Kenwood TS-B2000, TS-2000X User Manual

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ALL MODE MULTI-BAND TRANSCEIVER
TS-2000 TS-2000X TS-B2000
KENWOOD CORPORATION
© B62-1221-10 (K) 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
noitcurtsnI oDottahW
sserP ]YEK[]YEK[
]YEK[
]YEK[]YEK[ .esaelerdnasserP YEKYEK
YEK
YEKYEK .
sserP
]2YEK[+]1YEK[]2YEK[+]1YEK[
]2YEK[+]1YEK[
]2YEK[+]1YEK[]2YEK[+]1YEK[ .
dlohdnasserP 1YEK1YEK
1YEK
1YEK1YEK ,nwod
sserpneht 2YEK2YEK
2YEK
2YEK2YEK eraerehtfI.
dnasserp,syekowtnahterom
litnunrutniyekhcaenwoddloh
.desserpneebsahyeklanifeht
sserP
]1YEK[]1YEK[
]1YEK[
]1YEK[]1YEK[ , ]2YEK[]2YEK[
]2YEK[
]2YEK[]2YEK[ .
sserP 1YEK1YEK
1YEK
1YEK1YEK ,yliratnemom
esaeler 1YEK1YEK
1YEK
1YEK1YEK sserpneht, 2YEK2YEK
2YEK
2YEK2YEK .
sserP
][+]YEK[][+]YEK[
][+]YEK[
][+]YEK[][+]YEK[ .
,FFOrewopreviecsnartehthtiW
dlohdnasserp YEKYEK
YEK
YEKYEK hctiwsneht,
ybrewopreviecsnartehtNO
gnisserp ][][][][][ .)REWOP(
THANK YOU
Thank you for choosing this KENWOOD TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 transceiver. It has been developed by a team of engineers determined to continue the tradition of excellence and innovation in KENWOOD transceivers.
This transceiver features dual Digital Signal Processing (DSP) units to process IF and AF signals. By taking maximum advantage of DSP technology, the TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 gives you enhanced interference reduction capabilities and improves the quality of audio that you transmit without installing additional analog filters. You will notice the differences when you fight QRM and QRN. As you learn how to use this transceiver, you will also find that KENWOOD is pursuing “user friendliness”. For example, each time you change the Menu No. in Menu mode, you will see scrolling messages on the display that tell you what you are selecting.
Though user friendly, this transceiver is technically sophisticated and some features may be new to you. Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from the designers. Allow the manual to guide you through the learning process now, then act as a reference in the coming years.
FEATURES
All mode operation from HF to 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional) amateur radio band with DSP functions.
Dual high speed Digital Signal Processing (DSP) units.
Adjustable DSP filter frequencies.
High speed Digital Automatic Gain Control (AGC).
A second independent sub-receiver for the 144 MHz and 430 (440) MHz bands (FM and AM mode only).
A built-in Antenna Tuner for HF/ 50 MHz band.
A built-in 9600/ 1200 bps TNC for DX Packet Cluster Tune (P.C.T.) and Sky Command II+ operations.
DX Packet Cluster Tune (P.C.T.) for DX hunting.
Instant Satellite communication key.
A razor sharp DSP filter up to 50 Hz for CW operation.
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES
After carefully unpacking the transceiver, identify the items listed in the table. We recommend you keep the box and packing material below in case you need to repack the transceiver in the future.
Quantity
Accessory Part Number
enohporciMXX-2530-19T11
elbacrewopCDXX-7513-03E11 gulpNIDnip-7XX-1570-70E11 gulpNIDnip-8XX-1580-70E11
gulpNIDnip-31XX-1531-70E11
)A52(esuFXX-1352-50F11
)A4(esuFXX-7204-60F11
teSwercSXX-4202-99N11
034-BMrofrecapSXX-8962-11G44
1
retlifeniL
1
dnaBgniniateR
MOR-DCXX-3210-39T–1
launaMnoitcurtsnIXX-1221-26B11
kcolB/citamehcS
smargaiD
dracytnarraW
1
E and E2-type only
TS-2000
TS-2000X
XX-8041-97L11 XX-7030-16J11
XX-4160-25B XX-6160-25B
XX-7160-25B XX-8160-25B
XX-9640-64B
)epyt-K(
XX-0130-64B
)sepyt-EllA(
TS-B2000
11
11
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED
The writing conventions described below have been followed to simplify instructions and avoid unnecessary repetition.
i
MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL
NOTICE TO THE USER
The models listed below are covered by this manual. TS-2000: HF/ VHF/ UHF All-mode Multi-band
Transceiver
TS-2000X: HF/ VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHz All-mode
Multi-band Transceiver
TS-B2000: HF/ VHF/ UHF All-mode Multi-band
Transceiver
As for TS-B2000, refer to the on-line help for information on how to operate and control the transceiver. Refer to pages 2, 3, and 13 for the installation and information on the connectors.
MARKET CODES
K-type: The Americas E-type: Europe E2-type: Spain
The market code is shown on the carton box. Refer to the specifications {page 105} for the
information on available operating frequencies.
One or more of the following statements may be applicable for this equipment.
FCC WARNING
This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy. Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in the instruction manual. The user could lose the authority to operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or modification is made.
INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED BY THE FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that the interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer for technical assistance.
ii
PRECAUTIONS
Please observe the following precautions to prevent fire, personal injury, and transceiver damage:
Connect the transceiver only to a power source described in this manual or as marked on the transceiver itself.
Route all power cables safely. Ensure the power cables can neither be stepped upon nor pinched by items placed near or against the cables. Pay particular attention to locations near AC receptacles, AC outlet strips, and points of entry to the transceiver.
Take care not to drop objects or spill liquid into the transceiver through enclosure openings. Metal objects, such as hairpins or needles, inserted into the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in serious electrical shocks. Never permit children to insert any objects into the transceiver.
Do not attempt to defeat methods used for grounding and electrical polarization in the transceiver, particularly involving the power input cable.
Adequately ground all outdoor antennas for this transceiver using approved methods. Grounding helps protect against voltage surges caused by lightning. It also reduces the chance of a build-up of static charge.
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
Locate the transceiver away from heat sources such as a radiator, stove, amplifier or other devices that produce substantial amounts of heat.
Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, paint thinner, gasoline or benzene to clean the cabinet of the transceiver. Use a clean cloth with warm water or a mild detergent.
Disconnect the input power cable from the power source when the transceiver is not used for long periods of time.
Remove the transceiver’s enclosure only to do accessory installations described in this manual or accessory manuals. Follow provided instructions carefully, to avoid electrical shocks. If unfamiliar with this type of work, seek assistance from an experienced individual, or have a professional technician do the task.
Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the following cases:
a) The power supply or plug is damaged. b) Objects have fallen or liquid has spilled into the
transceiver. c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain. d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or
performance has seriously degraded. e) The transceiver has been dropped or the
enclosure damaged.
ANTENNA LEAD IN
GROUND CLAMP
ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM
WIRE
ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
GROUND CLAMPS
Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor antenna from power lines is one and one-half times the vertical height of the associated antenna support structure. This distance allows adequate clearance from the power lines if the support structure fails for any reason.
Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with its ventilation. Do not place books or other equipment on the transceiver that may impede the free movement of air. Allow a minimum of 4 inches (10 cm) between the rear of the transceiver and the wall or operating desk shelf.
Do not use the transceiver near water or sources of moisture. For example, avoid use near a bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a damp basement or attic.
The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is often a sign of trouble. Immediately turn the power OFF and remove the power cable. Contact a KENWOOD service station or your dealer for advice.
iii
CONTENTS
THANK YOU............................................................. i
FEA TURES...............................................................i
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ..................................... i
WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED .................. i
MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL................. ii
MARKET CODES .................................................... ii
NOTICE TO USER .................................................. ii
PRECAUTIONS.......................................................iii
CONTENTS............................................................ iv
CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION
ANTENNA CONNECTION....................................... 1
GROUND CONNECTION........................................ 1
LIGHTNING PROTECTION ..................................... 1
DC POWER SUPPL Y CONNECTION......................2
UTILIZING THE BAIL (TS-2000 (X)ONLY) ............... 2
REPLACING FUSES ............................................... 2
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS ............................... 3
FRONT PANEL ....................................................3
Headphones (PHONES).................................3
Microphone (MIC) ...........................................3
REAR P ANEL...................................................... 3
External Speakers (EXT. SP1/ EXT . SP2) ....... 3
Keys for CW (P ADDLE and KEY) ................... 3
CHAPTER 2 YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50MHz band)
RECEIVING............................................................. 4
TRANSMITTING...................................................... 5
CHAPTER 3 YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)
RECEIVING............................................................. 6
TRANSMITTING...................................................... 7
CHAPTER 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
FRONT PANEL ........................................................ 8
REAR P ANEL ........................................................13
DISPLA Y ............................................................... 14
MICROPHONE...................................................... 17
CHAPTER 5 OPERATING BASICS
SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF .............................18
ADJUSTING VOLUME .......................................... 18
AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN.......................18
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN ......................18
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B ............................. 18
SELECTING A BAND ............................................18
SELECTING A MODE............................................ 19
ADJUSTING SQUELCH ........................................ 19
SELECTING A FREQUENCY ................................ 19
FRONT PANEL METER......................................... 19
TRANSMITTING.................................................... 20
SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER ..................... 20
MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 20
CHAPTER 6 MENU SETUP
WHA T IS A MENU?................................................21
MENU A/ MENU B.................................................21
MENU ACCESS ....................................................21
QUICK MENU........................................................ 21
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU ............... 21
USING THE QUICK MENU ............................... 21
MENU CONFIGURA TION ..................................... 22
ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST......................... 26
CHAPTER 7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SSB TRANSMISSION ........................................... 28
FM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 28
AM TRANSMISSION .............................................29
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM ......................... 29
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM ......................... 29
CW TRANSMISSION ............................................ 30
AUTO ZERO-BEAT ........................................... 30
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY ......... 30
CHAPTER 8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION ........................ 31
TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET).......... 31
FM REPEATER OPERA TION................................ 32
PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET .......................... 32
Selecting an Offset Direction.........................32
Selecting an Offset Frequency ...................... 32
TRANSMITTING A TONE .................................. 33
Activating the Tone Function ......................... 33
Selecting a Tone Frequency..........................33
Selecting Continuous or Burst.......................33
Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone ........................ 33
AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET ................... 34
REVERSE FUNCTION ...................................... 34
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC) .............. 34
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN .....................................34
FM CTCSS OPERA TION.......................................35
CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN ................................... 35
FM DCS OPERA TION............................................. 36
DCS CODE ID SCAN ........................................ 36
CHAPTER 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
RECEIVING........................................................... 37
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY .................... 37
Direct Frequency Entry ................................. 37
Using 1 MHz Steps ....................................... 37
Quick QSY....................................................37
Fine Tuning...................................................38
Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B) .............. 38
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)..........38
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) ............... 38
TRANSMITTING.................................................... 39
VOX (VOICE-OPERA TED TRANSMIT) ............. 39
Microphone Input Level................................. 39
Delay Time ................................................... 39
SPEECH PROCESSOR .................................... 40
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING) ....... 40
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL
CHARACTERISTICS......................................... 41
TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/AM) ...................... 41
TX Equalizer (SSB/FM/AM) ..........................41
TRANSMIT INHIBIT........................................... 41
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE
TRANSMITTING................................................ 41
iv
CONTENTS
CW BREAK-IN....................................................... 42
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR
FULL BREAK-IN ................................................ 42
ELECTRONIC KEYER .......................................... 42
CHANGING KEYING SPEED ............................ 42
AUTO WEIGHTING ........................................... 42
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio ....................... 42
BUG KEY FUNCTION ....................................... 43
CW MESSAGE MEMORY ................................. 43
Storing CW Messages .................................. 43
Checking CW Messages without
Transmitting.................................................. 43
Transmitting CW Messages .......................... 43
Changing the Inter-message Interval Time....44
Changing the Sidetone Volume..................... 44
Inset Keying.................................................. 44
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW ............ 44
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE ............................ 44
CHAPTER 10 SUB-RECEIVER
SUB-RECEIVER.................................................... 45
TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND .......................... 45
TX BAND........................................................... 45
CONTROL BAND .............................................. 45
RECEIVING........................................................... 45
ACTIV ATING THE SUB-RECEIVER .................. 45
CONTROLLING THE SUB-RECEIVER .............45
SELECTING A BAND ........................................45
ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF)
GAIN .................................................................46
ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH ............................ 46
SELECTING A FREQUENCY ............................46
SUB-RECEIVER P ANEL METER ......................46
SELECTING A MODE FOR
THE SUB-RECEIVER........................................ 46
FM CTCSS OPERA TION...................................46
FM DCS OPERATION .......................................46
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN ..................................... 46
DCS CODE ID SCAN ........................................ 46
A TTENUATOR................................................... 47
PRE-AMPLIFIER ............................................... 47
DUAL WATCH ...................................................47
SCAN ................................................................ 47
NOISE REDUCTION ......................................... 47
TRANSMITTING.................................................... 47
SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER .................. 47
MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 47
FM REPEATER OPERATION ............................ 47
REVERSE FUNCTION ...................................... 47
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)..............48
TRANSMITTING A TONE .................................. 48
MEMORY .............................................................. 48
CHAPTER 11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
P ACKET RADIO .................................................... 49
BUIL T-IN TNC ........................................................ 49
PREP ARATION ..................................................... 50
DCD SENSE..........................................................50
RADIO TELETYPEWRITING (RTTY) .................... 51
AMTOR/PacTOR/CLOVER/G-TOR/PSK31 ........... 52
SLOW SCAN TV/ F ACSIMILE ............................... 52
DX P ACKET CLUSTER TUNE...............................53
SA TELLITE OPERATION ......................................53
BASIC OPERA TION..........................................53
STORING SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNELS ..54 RECALLING A SATELLITE MEMORY
CHANNEL .........................................................54
SA TELLITE CHANNEL NAME ...........................54
QUICK MEMORY IN SATELLITE MODE ........... 54
CHECKING THE UPLINK FREQUENCY........... 54
USING XIT/ RIT IN SATELLITE MODE .............. 54
CHANGING THE FREQUENCY BAND ............. 54
CHAPTER 12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE
DSP FILTERS ........................................................ 55
CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER
BANDWIDTH..................................................... 55
SSB/ FM/ AM Modes .................................... 55
CW/ FSK Modes........................................... 55
NOTCH FIL TER (SSB) ...................................... 56
BEA T CANCEL (SSB/ AM)................................. 56
MANUAL BEAT CANCEL (CW/ AM/ SSB) ......... 56
NOISE REDUCTION ......................................... 56
Setting the N.R.1 Level Adjustment............... 56
Settign the N.R.2 Time Constant................... 56
NOISE BLANKER.................................................. 57
PRE-AMPLIFIER ...................................................57
A TTENUATOR....................................................... 57
CHAPTER 13 MEMORY FEA TURES
MEMORY CHANNELS .......................................... 58
STORING DATA IN MEMOR Y ........................... 58
Simplex Channels......................................... 58
Split-Frequency Channels............................. 59
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL .................... 59
Memory Recall..............................................59
Memory Scroll...............................................60
Temporary Frequency Changes .................... 60
MEMORY-VFO SPLIT OPERATION .................. 60
MEMORY TRANSFER ...................................... 61
Memory VFO Transfer .............................61
Channel Channel Transfer ....................... 61
STORING FREQUENCY RANGES ................... 62
Confirming Start/End Frequencies ................62
Programmable VFO...................................... 62
Memory Channel Lockout ............................. 62
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS ..................... 62
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME ............................. 63
MEMORY GROUP ............................................ 64
Memory Group Select ................................... 64
QUICK MEMORY .................................................. 64
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY.................... 64
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS ..... 65
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES .......... 65
QUICK MEMORY VFO TRANSFER .............. 65
v
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 14 SCAN
NORMAL SCAN ....................................................66
VFO SCAN ........................................................ 66
PROGRAM SCAN ............................................. 67
PROGRAM SCAN P AR TIALLY SLOWED..........67
SCAN HOLD .....................................................68
MHz SCAN ........................................................ 68
MEMORY SCAN....................................................68
SCAN RESUME METHOD ................................ 68
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN ....................................... 68
GROUP SCAN .................................................. 69
CALL SCAN.......................................................69
VISUAL SCAN ................................................... 70
Using Visual Scan (VFO) .............................. 70
Changing the Number of Channels to Scan ..70
Using Visual Scan (Memory Channel)........... 70
CHAPTER 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
ALT (Auto Lock Tuning).......................................... 72
ANTENNAS ........................................................... 72
HF/ 50 MHz BAND.............................................72
VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHZ BAND ................................ 72
APO (Auto Power OFF) ......................................... 72
AUTOMA TIC ANTENNA TUNER ........................... 72
Presetting .......................................................... 73
ATTENUA T OR....................................................... 73
AUTO MODE......................................................... 73
BEEP FUNCTION.................................................. 74
CALL CHANNEL.................................................... 75
DISPLA Y ...............................................................75
BRIGH TN ESS...................................................75
CONTRAST.......................................................75
KEY ILLUMINATION .......................................... 75
DTMF .................................................................... 75
MANUAL DTMF DIALING.................................. 75
DTMF MEMORY ...............................................75
Entering DTMF tones.................................... 75
Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data ...76
DTMF T one T ime Length ..............................76
DTMF Pause Period ..................................... 76
HF RX ANTENNA.................................................. 76
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL ............................ 76
LOCK FUNCTIONS ............................................... 77
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION ...................... 77
LOCK ALL FUNCTION ...................................... 77
MICROPHONE PF KEYS ...................................... 77
MONITOR .............................................................77
PF KEY.................................................................. 77
RISE TIME OF CW ................................................77
RX DSP EQUALIZER ............................................ 78
EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO
(SSB/ FM/ AM)...................................................78
SEP ARATE SPEAKER OUTPUT ........................... 78
S-METER SQUELCH ............................................ 78
SQUELCH HANG TIME.....................................78
TIME-OUT TIMER ................................................. 78
TNC....................................................................... 79
TRANSVERTER....................................................79
TX MONITOR ........................................................ 79
TX POW E R ........................................................... 79
QUICK DATA TRANSFER ..................................... 80
SETTING UP ..................................................... 80
Equipment Needed ....................................... 80
Connections ................................................. 80
USING QUICK TRANSFER ............................... 80
Transferring Data.......................................... 80
Receiving Data ............................................. 80
COMPUTER CONTROL........................................ 81
SETTING UP ..................................................... 81
Equipment Needed ....................................... 81
Connections ................................................. 81
COMMUNICA TION PARAMETERS ....................... 81
REMOTE MICROPHONE CONTROLLER............. 81
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL (K-type ONLY) .. 82
PREP ARATION .................................................82
CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 82
SKY COMMAND II + (K-type ONLY) ...................... 83
PREP ARATION .................................................83
CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 84
USING TH-D7A AS A COMMANDER ................. 85
CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 85
USING ANOTHER TS-2000
AS A COMMANDER..........................................87
USING A SEP ARA TE TRANSPORTER ............. 88
REPEA TER FUNCTION (K-type ONLY)................. 88
LOCK-BAND REPEA TER.................................. 88
CROSS-BAND REPEA TER............................... 88
HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION ....... 88
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT
(OPTIONAL) .......................................................... 89
RECORDING MESSAGES................................ 89
MESSAGE PLA YBACK ..................................... 89
Checking Messages .....................................89
Sending Messages ....................................... 90
Erasing a Recorded Message ....................... 90
Changing Inter-message Interval Time.......... 90
Changing Playback Volume .......................... 90
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL)............91
MICROPROCESSOR RESET ............................... 92
INITIAL SETTINGS............................................ 92
PARTIAL RESET ............................................... 92
FULL RESET.....................................................92
CHAPTER 16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT
COMPUTER .......................................................... 93
COMP ATIBLE TRANSCEIVER .............................. 93
RTTY EQUIPMENT ............................................... 94
HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER ........................................ 94
ANTENNA TUNER ................................................ 94
MCP AND TNC ...................................................... 95
TYPICAL MCP/ TNC SETUP.................................96
LINEAR AMPLIFIER (50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430
(440) MHz and 1.2 GHz) ........................................ 96
vi
CHAPTER 17 INSTALLING OPTIONS
REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE ........................ 97
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT ...................97
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT........................ 97
MB-430 MOBILE BRACKET .................................. 98
RC-2000 REMOTE P ANEL.................................... 98
CHAPTER 18 MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION .................................... 99
SERVICE...........................................................99
SERVICE NOTE................................................ 99
CLEANING ........................................................ 99
LITHIUM BA TTERY ............................................... 99
TROUBLESHOOTING......................................... 100
OPERA TION NOTICES....................................... 103
TX SIGNAL HARMONICS ............................... 103
INTERNAL BEATS .......................................... 103
VISUAL SCAN ................................................. 103
SENSITIVITY (K-type ONLY) ........................... 103
AGC ................................................................ 103
SUB-RECEIVER.............................................. 103
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 19 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................ 104
CHAPTER 20 SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICA TIONS............................................... 105
CHAPTER 21 APPENDIX
TS-B2000 FRONT PANEL ................................... 109
BUIL T-IN TNC COMMAND LIST .......................... 110
COM CONNECTOR ............................................ 1 13
HARDWARE DESCRIPTION........................... 113
CONTROL OPERATION ................................. 113
COMPUTER CONTROL.................................. 114
Alphabetical Commands ............................. 114
Parameters................................................. 114
Terminator .................................................. 114
Error Messages .......................................... 114
PC CONTROL COMMAND TABLES ................... 115
CHAPTER 22 INDEX
INDEX ................................................................. 142
vii
INSTALLATION
Install and connect an antenna system {page 1}.
Install a ground system that satisfies DC and RF grounding requirements {page 1}.
Install lightning protection to protect the antenna system, your personal safety, and your property {page 1}.
ANTENNA CONNECTION
An antenna system consists of an antenna, feed line, and ground. The transceiver can give excellent results if the antenna system and its installation are given careful attention. Use a properly adjusted 50 antenna of good quality, a high-quality 50 coaxial cable, and first-quality connectors. All connections must be clean and tight.
After making the connections, match the impedance of the coaxial cable and antenna so that the SWR is
1.5:1 or less. High SWR will cause the transmit output to drop and may lead to radio frequency interference to consumer products such as stereo receivers and televisions. You may even interfere with your own transceiver. Reports that your signal is distorted could indicate that your antenna system is not efficiently radiating the transceiver’s power.
Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna feed line to ANT 1 on the rear of the transceiver. If you are using two HF/ 50 MHz antennas, connect the secondary antenna to ANT 2. Connect VHF (144 MHz), UHF (430/440 MHz), and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional) antennas to their respective antenna connectors on the rear of the transceiver. Refer to page 13 for the location of the antenna connectors.
Transmitting without connecting an antenna or other matched load may damage the transceiver. Always connect the antenna to the transceiver before transmitting.
All fixed stations should be equipped with a lightning arrester to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and transceiver damage.
Install and connect a DC power supply {page 2}.
Connect all accessories to the transceiver {pages 3, 94}. Accessories include the following:
• Microphone
• Antenna Tuner
• CW Key
• Computer
• TNC/ Multimode Communications Processor
• Headphones
• External Speaker
• RTTY Equipment
• Linear Amplifier
• Remote Panel
GROUND CONNECTION
At the minimum, a good DC ground is required to prevent such dangers as electric shock. For superior communications results, a good RF ground is required, against which the antenna system can operate. Both of these conditions can be met by providing a good earth ground for your station. Bury one or more ground rods or a large copper plate under the ground, then connect this to the transceiver GND terminal. Use heavy gauge wire or a copper strap, cut as short as possible, for this connection. Do not use a gas pipe, an electrical conduit, or a plastic water pipe as a ground.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Even in areas where lightning storms are less common, there are usually a limited number of storms each year. Consider carefully how to protect your equipment and home from lightning. The installation of a lightning arrestor is a start, but there is more that you can do. For example, terminate your antenna system transmission lines at an entry panel that you install outside your home. Ground this entry panel to a good outside ground, then connect the appropriate feed lines between the entry panel and your transceiver. When a lightning storm occurs, disconnecting the feed lines from your transceiver will ensure added protection.
Note: The transceiver’s protection circuit will activate when the SWR is greater than 2.5:1; however, do not rely on protection to compensate for a poorly functioning antenna system.
1
1 INSTALLATION
noitacoLesuF gnitaRtnerruCesuF
/)X(0002-ST
0002B-ST
A4
)renutannetnalanretxenaroF(
rewopCDdeilppuS
elbac
A52
DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
In order to use this transceiver, you need a separate
13.8 V DC power supply that must be purchased separately. Do not directly connect the transceiver to an AC outlet. Use the supplied DC power cable to connect the transceiver to a regulated power supply. Do not substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires. The current capacity of the power supply must be
20.5 A peak or more.
Fuse holders (Fuse 25 A)
RedBlack
TS-2000/ TS-2000X TS-B2000
First, connect the DC power cable to the regulated DC power supply; the red lead to the positive terminal and the black lead to the negative terminal. Next, connect the DC power cable to the transceiver’s DC power connector. Press the connectors firmly together until the locking tab clicks.
Note:
Before connecting the DC power supply to the transceiver, be sure to switch OFF the DC power supply and transceiver.
Do not plug the DC power supply into an AC outlet until you make all connections.
DC 13.8 V
REPLACING FUSES
If a fuse blows, determine the cause then correct the problem. Only after the problem has been resolved, replace the blown fuse with a new one with the specified ratings. If newly installed fuses continue to blow, disconnect the power plug and contact a KENWOOD service station or your dealer for assistance.
Fuse (4A)
UTILIZING THE BAIL (TS-2000(X) ONLY)
This transceiver is equipped with a bail so that you can angle the transceiver. The bail is located on the bottom of the transceiver. Pull the bail forward to the limit as shown.
Pull the bail
2
ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS
FRONT PANEL
Headphones (PHONES)
1 INSTALLATION
Connect monaural or stereo headphones having a 4 to 32 impedance. This jack accepts a
6.3 mm (1/4") diameter, 2-conductor (mono) or 3-conductor (stereo) plug. After connecting the headphones, you will hear no sound from the internal (or optional external) speaker.
Microphone (MIC)
Connect a microphone having an impedance between 250 and 600. Fully insert the connector, then screw the retaining ring clockwise until secure. Compatible microphones include the MC-43S, MC-47, MC-52DM, MC-60A, MC-80, MC-85, and MC-90. Do not use the MC-44, MC-44DM, MC-45, MC-45E, MC-45DM, MC-45DME, and MC-53DM microphones.
REAR PANEL
External Speakers (EXT.SP1/ EXT.SP2)
This transceiver has 2 independent receivers. Thus, it can output 2 separate audio signals. As a default, the transceiver mixes both audio signals internally and outputs them from the internal speaker. On the rear panel of the transceiver, there are 2 external speaker jacks. If an external speaker is connected to EXP.SP1, the internal speaker will mute. If the speaker is connected to EXT.SP2, both the external speaker and the internal speaker will function. Use only external speakers with an impedance of 4 to 8 (8 nominal). These jacks accept only 3.5 mm (1/8") diameter, 2-conductor (mono) plugs.
Headphone
Microphone
External speaker
TS-2000 TS-2000X TS-B2000
MIC
q
PTT
w e
DOWN
r
UP
MIC connector (Front view)
i
GND (STBY)
u
GND (MIC)
y
NC 8 V (10 mA max)
t
Do not connect headphones to this jack. The high audio output of this jack could damage your hearing.
Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY)
For CW operation using the internal electronic keyer, connect a keyer paddle to the PADDLE jack. For CW operation without using the internal electronic keyer, connect a straight key, semi-automatic key (bug), electronic keyer, or the CW keyed output from a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) to the KEY jack. The PADDLE and KEY jacks mate with a
6.3 mm (1/4") 3-conductor plug and a 3.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor plug respectively. External electronic keyers or MCPs must use positive keying to be compatible with this transceiver. Use a shielded cable between the key and the transceiver.
Note: Due to the functionality of the internal electronic keyer, you may find it unnecessary to connect both a paddle and another type of keyer unless you want to use a PC-based keyer for CW. Read the “ELECTRONIC KEYER” section {page 42} to become familiar with the internal keyer.
TS-2000 TS-2000X TS-B2000
GND
• Straight key • Paddle
• Bug key
• Electronic keyer
• MCP CW output
+
GND dash dot
3
YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50 MHz band)
Are you ready to give your TS-2000(X) a quick try? Reading these two pages should get your voice on the air in your first QSO on the HF/ 50 MHz band shortly. The instructions below are intended only for a quick guide. If you encounter problems or there is something you don’t understand, read the detailed explanations given later in this manual.
RECEIVING
62
CON
9.6k STA
PF
ATT
LEVEL
VOX
SEND
F LOCK
PHONES
MIC
A
PRE LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
MANUAL
LEVEL
LEVEL
WIDTH
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
C
H
1
/R
E
C
C
H
2/R
E
C
C
N.R.
A.N.
B.C.
LO/
H
1
2
TO
N
E
/SE
L
M
E
TE
R
C
T
C
4
5
N
B
/LE
V
E
L
AG
C
/O
F
F
FIN
7
8
D
C
S
/S
E
L
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
0
HI/
SHIFT
MAIN
C
N U F
CAR MIC
TX MONI
PWR DELAY
KEY
CLR
DISP
REV CW
FSK NAR FM
AM
AUTO LSB
USB
SEL
1MHz
3/R
E
C
3
SS
/S
E
L
6
E
/S
TEP
9
EN
T
CTRL
MENU
MAIN SUB
SUB
SG.SEL
SCAN
QUICK MEMO
M.IN
CALL
C.IN
MR
TF­SET
VFO/CH
VFO/M
MG.SEL
M VFO
L
T
A
S
REV
/S
M
SPLIT
/B
A
TRACE
A=B
M.IN
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
CLEAR P.C .T
SET
AIN
M
BC
NUAL
A
M
IN
A
G
F
R
IN
A
M
AF
L
SQ
MULTI
+
CH
UB
S
18 5 3 1 7 1 4
Note: This section explains only keys and controls required to briefly try the transceiver.
q Set the following as specified:
MAIN AF: Fully counterclockwise
MAIN RF GAIN: Fully clockwise
MAIN SQL: Fully counterclockwise
w Switch ON the DC power supply, then press
and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly on the transceiver.
Do not press the switch for more than approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver will be switched OFF.
Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed by the selected frequency and other indicators.
d
9
7
2
0
5
4
0
3
1
S
1
R
W
P
C
L
A
6
0
d
B
5
0
5
2
0
1
0
0
W
T
L
E
I
R
F
e Confirm that VFO A has been selected for
communications; “tA” should be visible on the display. If it has not, press [A/B] to select VFO A.
r Turn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise
until you hear a suitable level of background noise.
t Press [+] or [–] to select an HF/ 50 MHz
Amateur radio band.
y Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [FM/ AM/ NAR] to
select an operating mode.
To select the second mode on each key, press the same key again. For example, each press of [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] switches between LSB and USB modes.
u If you have selected FM, turn the MAIN SQL
control clockwise until the background noise is just eliminated; the MAIN band LED (above the [MIC/ CAR] key) turns off.
With LSB or USB selected, skip this step.
i Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station.
If you do not hear any stations, you may have the wrong antenna connector selected. Press [FUNC], [A T/ ANT1/2] to switch between the antenna 1 and 2 connectors.
4
2 YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50 MHz band)
P
W
R
1
0
2
5
5
0
1
0
0
W
F
I
L
T
E
R
S
1
3
5
7
9
2
0
4
0
6
0
d
B
A
L
C
TRANSMITTING
4 9
CON
9.6k STA
PF
F LOCK
A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
85 32
SEND
PHONES
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
LEVEL
C
H
1/R
E
C
C
H
2/R
EC
C
N.R.
TO
LEVEL
A.N.
MANUAL
MIC
B.C.
LO/
WIDTH
H
1
2
N
E
/S
EL
M
ET
E
R
C
TC
4
5
N
B
/LE
V
E
L
A
G
C
/O
F
F
F
IN
7
8
D
C
S
/S
E
L
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
0
HI/
SHIFT
MAIN
C
N U F
CAR MIC
TX MONI
PWR DELAY
KEY
AUTO LSB
USB REV CW
FSK NAR FM
AM
CLR
SEL
1MHz
DISP
3/R
E
C
3
SS
/S
E
L
6
E/S
T
E
P
9
E
N
T
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
SUB
MENU
CTRL
TF­SET
MAIN SUB
SG.SEL
SCAN
CALL
C.IN
M
VFO/CH
VFO/M
MG.SEL
M VFO
MR
/S
/B
A
QUICK MEMO
L
T
A
S
SPLIT
TRACE
A=B
M.IN
M.IN
REV
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
CLEAR P.C .T
SET
IN
A
M
C
B
L
A
U
AN
M
AIN
G
RF
AIN
M
AF
SQL
MULTI
+
H
C
B
SU
71
q Turn the Tuning control to tune in a desired
station or to select an unused frequency.
w Press [AT/ ANT1/2] momentarily.
•“AT” appears.
9
7
2
0
5
3
1
S
0
1
R
W
P
C
L
A
4
0
6
0
d
5
5
2
T
E
L
I
F
B
0
1
0
0
W
R
e Press and hold [AT/ ANT1/2] to activate the built-
in antenna tuner.
•“AT” starts blinking and the MAIN band LED above the [MIC/ CAR] key turns red.
9
7
2
0
5
3
1
S
0
1
R
W
P
C
L
A
4
0
6
0
d
5
5
2
T
E
L
I
F
B
0
1
0
0
W
R
Tuning should be completed in under 20 seconds, then “AT ” stops blinking.
If tuning is not completed within 20 seconds, error beeps sound. Press [A T/ ANT1/2] to stop the error beeps and quit tuning. Check your antenna system before continuing. If you do not press [A T/ ANT1/2], tuning will continue for approximately 60 seconds.
Note: You will hear a lot of clicking sounds coming from the transceiver while the antenna tuner is trying to tune the antenna. This is simply the relay switches turning ON and OFF.
r With LSB, USB, or AM selected, press
[MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone Gain Adjust.
“MIC GAIN 50” appears.
With FM selected, skip this step.
t Press [SEND].
The MAIN band LED turns red.
y Begin speaking into the microphone in your
normal tone of voice.
u LSB/ USB: While speaking into the microphone,
adjust the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects according to your voice level.
AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust the MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated power meter slightly reflects to your voice level.
FM: Skip this step.
i When you finish speaking, press [SEND] to return
to receive mode.
o Press [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain
Adjustment.
Note: If desired, access Menu No. 41 {page 28} to try the Microphone Gain Adjust for FM.
This completes your introduction to the TS-2000(X), but there is a great deal more to know. “OPERATING BASICS” {page 18} and the following chapters explain all the functions of this transceiver, starting with the most basic, commonly-used functions.
5
YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)
If your primary operating band is VHF (144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440 MHz), the TS-2000(X) can also serve you as a powerful All-mode VHF/ UHF transceiver. The instructions below are intended only for a quick guide to get you up on the air on the VHF/ UHF band. If you encounter problems or there is something you don’t understand, read the detailed explanations given later in this manual.
RECEIVING
62
9.6k STA
PF
ATT
LEVEL
VOX
SEND
F LOCK
PHONES
MIC
A
PRE LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
MANUAL
LEVEL
LEVEL
WIDTH
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
C
H
1/R
E
C
C
H
2/R
E
C
C
N
.R
.
A
.N
.
B
.C
.
LO/
H
1
2
TO
N
E/S
E
L
M
ET
ER
C
TC
4
5
N
B/LE
VEL
AG
C
/O
FF
FIN
7
8
D
C
S
/S
E
L
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
0
HI/
SHIFT
MAIN
C
N U F
CAR MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
CLR
DISP
REV CW
FSK NAR FM
AM
AUTO LSB
USB
SEL
1MHz
3/R
E
C
3
SS/S
EL
6
E
/STEP
9
E
N
T
CTRL
MENU
MAIN SUB
SUB
SG.SEL
SCAN
QUICK MEMO
M.IN
CALL
C.IN
MR
TF­SET
VFO/CH
VFO/M
MG.SEL
M VFO
L
T
A
S
EV
R
/S
M
SPLIT
/B
A
TRACE
A=B
M.IN
CW TUNE
RIT ALT
XIT
CLEAR P.C.T
SET
M
C
B
L
A
NU
A
M
G
RF
IN
A
M
CON
RIT/SUB
_
IN
A
AIN
F
A
L
Q
S
MULTI
S
+
H
C
B
U
18 5 3 1 7 1 4
Note: This section explains only keys and controls required to briefly try the transceiver.
q Set the following as specified:
MAIN AF: Fully counterclockwise
MAIN RF GAIN: Fully clockwise
MAIN SQL: Fully counterclockwise
w Switch ON the DC power supply, then press
and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly on the transceiver.
Do not press the switch for more than approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver will be switched OFF.
Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed by the selected frequency and other indicators.
9
7
2
0
5
4
0
3
1
S
0
1
R
W
P
C
L
A
6
0
d
B
5
0
5
2
1
0
0
W
T
E
L
I
R
F
e Press [MAIN], then confirm that VFO A has
been selected for communications; “tA” should be visible on the display. If it has not, press [A/B] to select VFO A.
r Turn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise
until you hear a suitable level of background noise.
y Confirm that the operating mode is FM. If it is
not, press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM.
u Turn the SQL control clockwise until the
background noise is just eliminated; the MAIN band LED turns off.
i Turn the Tuning control to tune in a station.
You can use the MULTI/ CH control to change the frequency faster. If you do not hear any stations, the antenna may not be installed or connected properly. Check the antenna connector on the rear panel {page 13}.
t Press [+] or [–] to move up to the VHF
(144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440 MHz) Amateur radio band.
9
7
2
0
5
4
0
3
1
S
0
1
R
W
P
C
L
A
6
0
d
B
5
0
5
2
1
0
0
W
T
E
L
I
R
F
6
TRANSMITTING
PF
F LOCK
A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
PHONES
LEVEL
C
H
1/R
E
C
C
H
2
/R
E
C
C
N.R.
LEVEL
A.N.
MANUAL
MIC
B.C.
LO/
WIDTH
H
1
2
T
O
N
E
/S
E
L
M
E
TE
R
C
TC
4
5
N
B
/L
E
V
E
L
A
G
C
/O
FF
FIN
7
8
D
C
S
/S
E
L
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
0
HI/
SHIFT
q Confirm that the operating mode is FM. If it is not,
press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to change the operating mode to FM.
w Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH control
to tune in a desired station or to select an unused frequency.
e Press [SEND].
The MAIN band LED turns red.
MAIN
C
N U F
CAR MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
CLR
DISP
REV CW
FSK NAR FM
AM
AUTO LSB
USB
SEL
1MHz
3/R
E
C
3
S
S
/S
E
L
6
E
/S
TE
P
9
E
N
T
1 23 5
3 YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
SUB
MENU
CTRL
TF­SET
MAIN SUB
SG.SEL
SCAN
CALL
M VFO
C.IN
/S
M
A
VFO/CH
VFO/M
MG.SEL
MR
/B
QUICK MEMO
L
T
A
S
SPLIT
TRACE
A=B
M.IN
M.IN
REV
MANUAL
9.6k STA
CW TUNE
RIT ALT
XIT
CLEAR P.C.T
SET
MAIN
BC
GAIN
RF
AIN
M
CON
RIT/SUB
_
AF
SQL
MULTI
SUB
+
CH
r Begin speaking into the microphone in your
normal tone of voice.
9
7
2
0
5
3
1
S
0
1
R
W
P
C
L
A
4
0
6
0
d
B
5
0
5
2
1
0
0
W
T
E
L
I
R
F
t When you finish speaking, press [SEND] to return
to receive mode.
This completes your introduction on how to receive and transmit using the TS-2000(X) on a VHF/ UHF band. Refer to “OPERATING BASICS” {page 18} and the following chapters for explanations on all the functions of this transceiver.
7
GETTING ACQUAINTED
FRONT PANEL
2
1
PF
F LOCK
3
4
5
6
7
8 9
10
ATT
LEVEL
VOX
SEND
PHONES
MIC
PRE
LEVEL
ANT1/2
11
A
PROC
AT
MANUAL
LEVEL
LEVEL
12
N
A
B
LO/
WIDTH
13
CH
1/RE
C
C
H2/R
EC
C
H3/REC
1
.R
2
.
TONE
/SEL
M
ETE
R
CTC
4
5
.N
.
NB/LEVE
L
AG
C
/OF
F
FIN
7
.C
8
D
C
S
/S
E
L
.
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
0
HI/
SHIFT
3
S
S/SEL
6
E/STEP
9
ENT
C N U F
CAR MIC
TX MONI
PWR DELAY
KEY
MAIN
CLR
DISP
REV CW
FSK NAR FM
AM
AUTO LSB
USB
9.6k STA
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
SUB
MENU
TF-
SET
MAIN SUB
SEL
1MHz
CTRL
SG.SEL
SCAN
C
A L
L
M VFO
C
.IN
/S
M
A
VFO/CH
VFO/M
MG.SEL
QUICK MEMO
MR
/B
M.IN
L
T
A
S
R
SPLIT
TRACE
A=B
M.IN
CW TUNE
RIT ALT
XIT
CLEAR
P.C.T
SET
M
C
B
L
A
U
N
A
M
F
R
V
E
IN
A
M
CON
RIT/SUB
_
IN
A
IN
A
G
F
A
L
Q
S
MULTI
+
H
C
B
U
S
q PF key You can assign a function to this Programmable
Function key. The default function is Voice 1 {page 77}.
w [ ] (POWER) switch Press and hold briefly to switch the transceiver power
ON. Press again to switch the power OFF. e ATT/ F LOCK key Press to switch the receiver attenuator ON or OFF
{page 57}. Press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to switch the Frequency Lock function ON or OFF {page 77}.
r PRE/ LOCK A key Press to switch the receiver pre-amplifier ON or OFF
{page 57}. Press [FUNC], [PRE/ LOCK A] to lock all the transceiver keys {page 77}.
t VOX/ LEVEL key In voice mode, press to switch the Voice-Operated
Transmit function ON or OFF {page 39}. In CW mode, press to switch the Break-in function ON or OFF {page 42}. Press [FUNC], [VOX/ LEVEL] to adjust the microphone input level for VOX operation. The VOX LED lights orange when the VOX function is active.
y PROC/ LEVEL key Press to switch the Speech Processor for transmitting
ON or OFF {page 40}. Press [FUNC], [PROC/ LEVEL] to adjust the Speech Processor input level. The PROC LED lights orange when the Speech Processor function is actived.
u SEND key Press to switch the transceiver between receive
mode and transmit mode {pages 5, 7}.
i AT/ ANT1/2 key Press to activate the internal antenna tuner {page 72}
or an external antenna tuner. Press [FUNC], [A T/ ANT1/2] to select either Antenna 1 or Antenna 2 for the HF/ 50 MHz band {page 72}.
o PHONES jack Connect a set of headphones to this jack. Inserting a
plug into the jack automatically mutes the audio from the speaker {pages 3, 78}.
!0 MIC connector Connect a compatible microphone to this connector,
then securely screw down the connector locking ring {page 3}.
!1 N.R./ LEVEL key Press to switch the DSP Noise Reduction function
ON or OFF. Press [FUNC], [N.R./ LEVEL] to adjust the Noise Reduction level. Press [FUNC], [N.R./ LEVEL] again to finish the adjustment {page 56}.
!2 A.N./ LEVEL key Press to switch the DSP Auto Notch function ON or
OFF. Press [FUNC], [A.N./ LEVEL] to adjust the DSP Auto Notch reduction level. Press [FUNC], [A.N./ LEVEL] again to finish the adjustment {page 56}.
!3 B.C./ MANUAL key Press to switch the DSP Auto Beat Cancel function
ON or OFF. Press [FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL] to adjust the beat cancel frequency manually. Press [FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL] again to finish the manual adjustment {page 56}.
8
PF
ATT
LEVEL
VOX
SEND
F LOCK
PHONES
MIC
A
PRE
LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
LEVEL
LEVEL
MANUAL
WIDTH
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
16
CON
9.6k STA
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
CH1/R
EC
CH2/RE
C
T
ON
NB/LEV
D
1 4 7
C
E/SEL
S
/S
.
CH3/REC
2
M
ETER
CTCSS/S
5
EL
AG
C/O
FF
FINE
8
E
L
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
0
HI/
SHIFT
N
.R
.
A
.N
.
B
.C
.
LO/
MAIN
AUTO
CAR
C
N U F
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
CLR
DISP
REV CW
FSK NAR FM
AM
LSB USB
SEL
1MHz
3
EL
6
/STEP
9
E
NT
CTRL
MENU
MAIN SUB
SUB
SET
SG.SEL
SCAN
QUICK MEMO
M.IN
CALL
C.IN
MR
TF-
SATL
E
R
/S
M
SPLIT
/B
A
TRACE
VFO/CH
A=B
VFO/M
MG.SEL
M.IN
M VFO
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
CLEAR P.C .T
SET
IN
A
M
C
B
L
A
U
N
A
M
V
IN
A
G
F
R
IN
A
M
F
A
L
Q
S
MULTI
+
H
C
B
U
S
14
15
18
17
!4 Multi-purpose keypad Consists of 10 keys that are used to enter numeric
data. Also used for the following functions:
1/ CH1/REC, 2/ CH2/REC, and 3/ CH3/REC keys Press to play back or record the CW or voice
messages that are associated with the DRU-3A Digital Recording Unit {page 89} and the internal electronic keyer {page 43}.
4/ TONE/SEL key Press to activate the sub-audible Tone function to
access repeaters for FM mode. To select the Tone frequency, press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL], then select your desired tone frequency using the MULTI/ CH control {page 33}.
5/ METER key Press to select the meter scales {page 19}.
6/ CTCSS/SEL key Press to activate the Continuous Tone Coded
Squelch System (CTCSS) function for FM mode. To select the CTCSS tone frequency, press [FUNC], [5/ CTCSS/SEL], then select your desired CTCSS tone frequency using the MULTI/ CH control {page 35}.
7/ NB/LEVEL key Press to switch the Noise Blanker ON or OFF.
Press [FUNC], [7/ NB/LEVEL] to adjust the Noise Blanker level {page 57}.
8/ AGC/OFF key Press to adjust the response time of the Automatic
Gain Control. To switch the AGC OFF, press [FUNC], [8/ AGC/OFF] {page 38}.
9/ FINE/STEP key Press to activate the Fine tuning mode to allow
more precise tuning {page 38}.
•/ DCS/SEL key Press to activate the Digital Coded Squelch
function for FM mode. To select the DCS code, press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL], then select your desired code using the MULTI/ CH control {page 36}.
0/ SHIFT/OFFSET key Press to switch the Shift function for FM mode ON
or OFF when accessing the repeaters. The Shift frequency can be manually adjusted by pressing [FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET], then adjusting the shift frequency value using the MULTI/ CH control {page 32}.
ENT key Press to enter your desired frequency using the
keypad {page 37}.
!5 FUNC key Press to access the secondary functions that are
assigned to the keys. While FUNC is active, the FUNC LED lights orange.
!6 MIC/ CAR key Press to adjust the microphone gain {page 20}.
While the Speech Processor function is ON, it becomes the Speech Processor output level adjustment key {page 40}.
Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to adjust the carrier level for CW, FSK and AM mode {page 20}.
!7 PWR/ TX MONI key Press to adjust the output power {page 20}. Press
[FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI] to monitor your transmission signal {page 79}.
!8 KEY/ DELAY key Press to adjust the internal electronic keyer speed.
Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] to adjust the VOX delay time or break-in time (Full break-in/ Semi break-in time) for CW mode {page 42}.
9
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
19
20
PF
F LOCK
A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
PHONES
MIC
AT
LEVEL
LEVEL
MANUAL
WIDTH
C
H
1/R
E
C
C
H
2/R
E
C
C
N.R.
TO
A.N.
B.C.
LO/
H
1
2
N
E
/S
E
L
M
E
T
E
R
C
TC
4
5
N
B
/LE
V
E
L
A
G
C
/O
F
F
F
IN
7
8
D
C
S
/S
E
L
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
0
HI/
SHIFT
MAIN
FU
21
C N
CAR MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
CLR
AUTO LSB
USB REV CW
FSK NAR FM
AM
SEL
1MHz
DISP
23
24 26
3
/R
E
C
3
S
S
/S
E
L
6
E
/S
T
E
P
9
E
N
T
22
!9 LSB/ USB/ AUTO key Press to select lower sideband (LSB) or upper
sideband (USB) mode for voice or digital operation. Press [FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to toggle the auto mode selection {page 73}.
@0 CW/ FSK/ REV key Press to select CW or FSK (Frequency Shift Keying)
mode {pages 30, 51}. Press [FUNC], [CW/ FSK/ REV] to reverse the sideband pitch.
@1 FM/ AM/ NAR key Press to select FM or AM mode {pages 28, 29}.
Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select narrow bandwidth transmission mode {page 29}.
@2 CLR key Press to exit from, abort, or reset various functions.
Also used to erase memory channels {page 62} or locking out memory channels from the scan list {page 62}.
@3 DISP key Press to toggle the normal operating mode and DSP
filter setting display mode {page 55}. Press and hold to start the Visual Scan function {page 70}.
@4 1MHz/ SEL key Press to switch the MHz Up/ Down function ON or
OFF using the MULTI/ CH control. Press [FUNC], [1MHz/ SEL] to change the increment/ decrement step value {page 37}. Press and hold to start the MHz Scan function {page 68}.
@5 Tuning control Turn to select the desired frequency {page 37}. Use
the convenient finger-tip cavity for continuous tuning.
25
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
CTRL
27
MENU
MAIN SUB
28 33
SUB
TF­SET
SG.SEL
SCAN
CALL
M VFO
C.IN
/S
M
A
VFO/CH
VFO/M
MG.SEL
QUICK MEMO
MR
/B
9.6k STA
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT XIT
CLEAR P.C.T
SET
MAIN
BC
AL
MANU
M.IN
L
T
A
S
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
A=B
M.IN
G
RF
AIN
M
CON
RIT/SUB
_
AIN
AF
SQL
MULTI
+
CH
SUB
32
29
30
31
@7 MENU key Press to select or cancel the Menu mode that is used
for activating and configuring functions {page 21}. @8 TF-SET key While operating split-frequency, press to monitor or
change your transmit frequency {page 31}. @9 +/ – (Up/ Down) keys Press to step through all the Amateur radio bands
consecutively {page 18}. Also used to make selections from the Menu {page 21}, and to check the Start and End frequencies of the Scan function {page 62}.
#0 MAIN key Press to transfer the operating controls to the MAIN
transceiver. Also moves the transmission band to the main transceiver frequency.
#1 SUB key Press to transfer the operating controls to the sub-
receiver. Also moves the transmission band to the sub-receiver frequency.
#2 SCAN/ SG.SEL key Press to start or stop the Scan function {page 66}.
Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to select a scan group {page 69}.
#3 CALL/ C.IN key Press to recall a call channel for the selected operating
band (HF/ 50 MHz/ 144 MHz/ 430 (440) MHz/ 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional)). Press [FUNC], [CALL/ C.IN] to write a new Call Channel to the memory {page 75}.
The lever behind this control adjusts the control torque level; turn fully clockwise for light torque or fully counterclockwise for heavy torque.
@6 CTRL key Press to toggle the operating controls between the
main transceiver and the sub-receiver. The transmission band is not affected by this key.
10
PF
ATT
LEVEL
VOX
SEND
F LOCK
PHONES
MIC
A
PRE
LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
LEVEL
LEVEL
MANUAL
WIDTH
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
4041
36 35
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
CTRL
MENU
MAIN SUB
SUB
SET
SG.SEL
SCAN
CALL
C
MR
TF-
.IN
M/S
A/B
/C
VFO
/M
VFO
MG.SEL
M VFO
C
H
1
/R
E
C
C
H
2
/R
E
C
C
N
.R
.
T
A
.N
.
B
.C
.
LO/
H
1
2
O
N
E
/S
E
L
M
E
T
E
R
C
T
C
4
5
N
B
/L
E
V
E
L
A
G
C
/O
F
F
F
IN
7
8
D
C
S
/S
E
L
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
0
HI/
SHIFT
MAIN
C
N U F
CAR
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
CLR
DISP
REV CW
FSK NAR FM
AM
AUTO LSB
USB
SEL
1MHz
3
/R
E
C
3
S
S
/S
E
L
6
E
/S
T
E
P
9
E
N
T
37 38
QUICK MEMO
L
T
A
S
SP
H
A=B
M.IN
M.IN
REV
LIT
AC
TR
4234 4339
MANUAL
E
BC
MAIN
CW TUNE
RIT
ALT XIT
CLEAR P.C .T
SET
RF
MAIN GAIN
CON
9.6k STA RIT/SUB
_
AF
SQL
MULTI
+
CH
SUB
#4 QUICK MEMO keys Controls the Quick Memory function {page 64}.
MR key Press to recall data from the Quick Memory
{page 65}.
M.IN key Press to write data into the Quick Memory
{page 64}.
#5 SATL key Press to activate Satellite communication mode
{page 53}. #6 Frequency control keys These keys control functions related to selecting a
frequency, a VFO, or a memory channel.
A/B / M/S key Press to select either VFO A or VFO B {page 18}.
In Satellite mode, press to swap the MAIN and SUB frequencies so that you can change the frequencies with a main Tuning control {page 54}.
SPLIT/ REV key Press to use split-frequency operation which
allows you to use different transmit and receive frequencies {page 31}. In Satellite mode, press to toggle the Trace Reverse function ON and OFF {page 54}.
VFO/M / VFO/CH key Press to select either Memory or VFO mode
{page 59}. In Satellite mode, press to toggle the VFO and memory channel operations {page 54}.
A=B/ TRACE key Press to copy the data in the currently selected
VFO to the other VFO {page 31}. In Satellite mode, press to toggle the TRACE function ON and OFF {page 54}.
ss
#7 M
sVFO/ MG.SEL key
ss
Press to transfer data from a memory channel to a VFO {page 61}. Press [FUNC], [M/ VFO/ MG.SEL] to enter Memory Group Select mode {page 64}.
#8 M.IN key Writes data into a memory channel {page 58} or
selects Memory Scroll mode {page 60}. #9 RIT/ CW TUNE key Press to switch the Receive Incremental Tuning
function ON or OFF {page 38}. Press [FUNC], [RIT/ CW TUNE] to activate the automatic zero-beat function for CW mode {page 30}.
$0 XIT/ ALT key Press to switch the Transmit Incremental Tuning
function ON or OFF {page 40}. Press [FUNC], [XIT/ AL T] to switch the Auto Lock Tuning mode for the 1.2 GHz band (FM) ON or OFF {page 72}.
$1 CLEAR key Press to reset the RIT/XIT frequency offset to zero
{pages 38, 40}. $2 SET/ P.C.T. key Press to set received DX Packet Cluster frequency
data to the main transceiver when the Packet Cluster Tune mode is activated. Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] to switch the Packet Cluster Tune mode ON or OFF {page 53}.
$3 TNC Status Indicators
9.6k LED Lights when the internal TNC is operating at
9600 bps. The default operating mode is 1200 bps {page 50}.
STA LED Lights when the internal TNC holds the data in the
buffer to transmit.
CON LED Lights when the internal TNC is connected to
another TNC.
11
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
PF
F LOCK
A
ATT
PRE
LEVEL
LEVEL
VOX
PROC
ANT1/2
SEND
AT
PHONES
LEVEL
N
.R
LEVEL
A
.N
MANUAL
MIC
B
LO/
WIDTH
474654 55 4445
HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
C
H
1/R
EC
C
H
2/R
E
C
C
H
1
2
.
TO
N
E/S
E
L
M
E
TE
R
C
TC
4
5
.
N
B/LE
VE
L
AG
C
/O
F
F
F
IN
7
8
.C
D
C
S
/S
E
L
.
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
0
HI/
SHIFT
MAIN
C
N U F
CAR MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
CLR
DISP
REV CW
FSK NAR FM
AM
AUTO LSB
USB
SEL
1MHz
3/R
E
C
3
S
S
/SE
L
6
E/S
TE
P
9
E
N
T
CTRL
MENU
MAIN SUB
SUB
SET
SG.SEL
SCAN
QUICK MEMO
M.IN
CALL
C.IN
MR
TF-
L
T
A
S
E
R
/S
M
SPLIT
/B
A
TRACE
VFO/CH
A=B
VFO/M
MG.SEL
M.IN
M VFO
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB
ALT
XIT
_
CLEAR P.C.T
SET
IN
A
M
C
B
AL
U
AN
M
V
AIN
G
F
R
AIN
M
AF
L
SQ
MULTI
SU
+
H
C
B
CON
9.6k STA
5352 51504948
$4 RIT/SUB control After switching the RIT or XIT function ON, turn this
control to select the desired frequency offset {pages 38, 40}.
Turn to adjust the sub-receiver frequency when the RIT and XIT functions are switched OFF and the sub­receiver is switched ON {page 45}.
$5 MANUAL BC control Turn to adjust the audio notch frequency while the
DSP beat cancel function is set to the manual frequency adjustment mode {page 56}.
$6 MAIN RF GAIN control Turn to adjust the radio frequency gain for the main
transceiver {page 18}. $7 MULTI/ CH control In VFO mode, rotate to step the operating frequency
up or down {page 37}. In memory channel mode, rotate to select a memory channel {page 58}. Also used for selecting Menu numbers when accessing the Menu mode {page 21} and as a selector to choose settings for various functions activated by front panel buttons. The MULTI/ CH LED lights when the setting(s) can be changed using the MULTI/ CH control.
$8 MAIN SQL control Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker, the head
phones and AF output on ACC2 (13-pin DIN connector) when no receive signal is present on the main transceiver {page 19}.
%1 SUB AF control Press to switch the sub-receiver ON or OFF. When it
is ON, the SUB-receiver LED lights orange. Turn to adjust the volume for the sub-receiver. %2 LO/ WIDTH control Turn clockwise/ counterclockwise to increase/
decrease the value for the low cut-off DSP filter frequency or the filter bandwidth (CW/ FSK). The selected value appears on the main dot-matrix display {page 55}.
%3 HI/ SHIFT control Turn clockwise/ counterclockwise to increase/
decrease the value for the high cut-off DSP filter frequency or the Shift frequency. The selected value appears on the sub dot-matrix display {page 55}.
%4 MAIN band LED Lights green while the main transceiver’s squelch is
open. Lights red while transmitting on the main transceiver’s VFO band.
%5 SUB band LED Lights green while the sub-receiver’s squelch is open.
Lights red while transmitting on the sub-receiver’s VFO band.
$9 MAIN AF control Turn to adjust the volume on the main transceiver
{page 19}. %0 SUB SQL control Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker, head
phone and AF output on ACC2 (13-pin DIN connector) when no receive signal is present on the sub-receiver {page 46}.
12
REAR PANEL
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
1
2 1
ANT 2 ANT 1
PANELCOM
9
10 12 13 14 1511
7
EXT. SP2
8
GND
EXT. SP1
8
q ANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna to ANT1. If
you are using 2 antennas for the HF/ 50 MHz band, connect the secondary antenna to the ANT2 connector.
w GND post Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap between
the ground post and the nearest earth ground {page 1}. e KEY and PADDLE jacks The PADDLE jack mates with a 6.3 mm (1/4")
3-conductor plug for connecting a keyer paddle to the internal electronic keyer. The KEY jack mates with a
3.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor plug for connecting an external key for CW operation. Read “Keys for CW (PANEL and KEY)” {page 3} before using these jacks.
r AT connector Mates with the connector on the cable supplied with
the external antenna tuner. Refer to the instruction manual supplied with the tuner for more information.
t ANT 144
Connect your 144 MHz band antenna to this connector.
y ANT 430
Connect your 430 (440) MHz band antenna to this connector.
u ANT 1.2G (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional) Connect your 1.2 GHz band antenna to this connector. i DC 13.8V power input connector Connect a 13.8 V DC power source to this connector
{page 2}. Use the cable supplied with the regulated DC power supply.
32 4 5 86
PADDLE
KEY
EXT. CONT
ACC2
o COM connector Mates with a 9-pin female RS-232C connector for
connecting a computer via one of its serial communication ports {page 93}. Also used with the Quick Data Transfer function {page 93}.
!0 PANEL connector Connect a cable from the optional separate remote
panel (RC-2000) to this connector. !1 EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2 jacks Mate with a 3.5 mm (1/8"), 2-conductor (mono) plugs
for connecting external speakers {pages 3, 78}. !2 EXT.CONT connector Connect your 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz or
1.2 GHz linear amplifier control cable to this connector {page 76}.
!3 ACC2 connector Mates with a 13-pin male DIN connector for
connecting various accessory equipment, such as an external TNC/ MCP or a RTTY terminal {page 94}.
!4 REMOTE connector Mates with a 7-pin male DIN connector for connecting
an HF linear amplifier {page 76}. Do not connect 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz, or 1.2 GHz linear amplifier controls to this connector; use the EXT.CONT connector instead.
!5 HF RX ANT connector Connect a separate receive-only antenna for HF low
bands to this jack (RCA connector) {page 76}.
ANT
430
REMOTE
AT
ANT
144
ANT 1.2G
HF RX ANT
DC
13.8V
13
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
DISPLAY
9
7
2
5
3
1
S
0
1
R
W
P
C
L
A
0
4
0
5
0
5
2
T
L
I
F
1
E
R
8
12 14 16
61
11 13 15
7
6
0
d
B
0
0
W
%
2 4
10
93 5
q METER
While receiving, serves as an S-meter to measure and display the received signal strength. It also displays the filter width. While transmitting, serves as a power meter plus an ALC meter, an SWR meter, or a Speech Processor compression meter. The Peak Hold function holds each reading for approximately half a second.
Note: SWR meter works only for the HF and 50 MHz bands.
w
Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 72} or an external antenna tuner is in-line for the HF/ 50 MHz band reception.
e AT
Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 72} or an external antenna tuner is in-line for the HF/ 50 MHz band transmission.
r
Appears while HF RX ANT {page 76} connector is enabled to receive HF band signals. You cannot transmit the signals though this connector.
t
Either “ANT 1” or “ANT 2” appears, depending on whether the Antenna 1 connector or the Antenna 2 connector is selected for the HF/ 50 MHz band {page 72}.
y MHz
Appears when the MHz Up/ Down mode using the MULTI/ CH control is switched ON {page 37}.
u ALT
Appears when ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) is activated for the 1.2 GHz (FM) band {page 72}.
i
Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is being used {page 59}.
o
Shows the memory channel number for the main transceiver. If you select a channel over 99, a leading digit (1 or 2) appears (the memory number ranges from 00 to 299). It also shows the Quick Memory number location (the Quick Memory number ranges from “0_” to “9_”).
!0 AUTO
Appears when Auto mode selection is activated {page 73}.
!1
Appears when the main transceiver is selected for the transmission band.
!2
Appears when the main transceiver’s functions can be controlled using the front panel keys.
!3 ATT
Appears when the main transceiver’s receiver attenuator (–12 dB) is ON {pages 57, 73}.
!4 TNC
Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the main transceiver {page 49}.
!5 PRE
Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier of the main transceiver is ON {page 57}.
!6 + =
“+” or “–” appears, indicating which offset direction is selected for the main transceiver. “=” appears when the –7.6 MHz (430MHz) or –6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz) offset is selected (all E-types only) {page 32}.
14
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
302218 2420
2117 19 23 25 282726 29
9
7
2
5
3
1
S
0
1
R
W
P
C
L
A
0
4
0
6
0
d
5
0
5
2
T
E
L
I
R
F
B
1
0
0
W
%
3331 3234
!7 DCS
Appears when the DCS (Digital Code Squelch) of the main transceiver is ON {page 36}.
!8 [R]
“R” appears when the Reverse function of the main transceiver is ON. “[R]” appears when the ASC (Automatic Simplex Check) of the main transceiver is activated {page 34}.
!9 C T
“T” appears when the Tone function of the main transceiver is ON {page 33}. “C T” appears when the Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS) of the main transceiver is ON {page 35}.
@0 AGC
Appears when the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) of the main transceiver is ON {page 38}. Disappears when the AGC is OFF.
@1 M.B.C.
“B.C.” appears when the automatic Beat Canceller is ON. “M.B.C.” appears when the single Beat Cancel frequency is manually controlled {page 56}.
@2 NB
Appears when the Noise Blanker is ON {page 57}.
@3 FINE
Appears when the Fine function for the main Tuning control is ON {page 38}.
@4 A.NOTCH
Appears when the DSP Auto Notch function of the main transceiver is ON {page 56}.
@5
” or “ ” appears, depending on whether DSP Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced method) or Noise Reduction 2 (SPAC method) of the main transceiver is selected {page 56}.
@6
” appears when the TX Equalizer function is ON. “ ” appears when the RX Equalizer function of the main transceiver is ON {pages 41, 78}.
@7
Appears when the Quick Menu function of the transceiver is ON {page 21}. It also appears when the frequency point of Program Scan Partially Slowed is selected on the main-transceiver {page 67}.
@8
” appears when the Trace function is ON while in Satellite mode. “ ” appears when the Reverse Trace function is ON {page 53}.
@9 P.C.T.
Appears when Packet Cluster Tune mode is ON {page 53}.
#0 SPLIT
Appears when the transmit frequency differs from the receive frequency {page 31}.
#1 tA s
tA” or “As” appears while VFO A is selected {page 18}. “A” appears while Menu A is being accessed {page 21}.
#2 tB s
tB” or “Bs” appears while VFO B is selected {page 18}. “B” appears while Menu B is being accessed {page 21}.
#3 tM s
tM” or “Ms” appears while a simplex memory channel is selected {page 59}. “tMs” appears while a split frequency memory channel is selected {page 60}.
#4
” appears when the Frequency Lock function is ON. “ ” appears when the Lock All key function is ON {page 77}.
15
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
9
7
2
5
3
1
S
0
1
R
W
P
C
L
A
0
4
0
6
0
d
5
0
5
2
T
E
L
I
R
F
B
1
0
0
W
%
57 55 5842 45 49 48 56
#5
Appears while in Satellite mode {page 53}.
#6
Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is being used for the sub-receiver {page 59}.
#7
Shows the memory channel number for the sub­receiver. If you select a channel over 99, a leading digit (1 or 2) appears (the memory number ranges from 00 to 299).
#8
Appears when the sub-receiver is selected for the transmission band.
#9
Appears when the sub-receiver’s functions can be controlled using the front panel keys.
$0 ATT
Appears when the sub-receiver’s receive attenuator (–12 dB) is ON {pages 57, 73}.
$1 TNC
Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the sub-receiver.
$2 XIT
Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning of the main transceiver is ON {page 40}.
$3 PRE
Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier of the sub­receiver is ON {page 57}.
$4 + =
“+” or “–” appears, indicating which offset direction is selected for the sub-receiver. “=” appears when the –7.6 MHz (430MHz) or –6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz) offset is selected (all E-types only) {page 32}.
39 41 47 5452443637
50
38 40 43 534635 51
$5 RIT
Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning of the main transceiver is ON {page 38}.
$6 DCS
Appears when the DCS (Digital Code Squelch) of the sub-receiver is ON {page 36}.
$7 [R]
“R” appears when the Reverse function of the sub­receiver is ON. “[R]” appears when the ASC (Automatic Simplex Check) of the sub-receiver is activated {page 34}.
$8 S
Appears when the sub-receiver meter shows the signal strength level {page 46}.
$9 PWR
Appears when the sub-receiver meter shows the output power level {page 20}.
%0
Serves as an S-meter to measure and display the received signal strength for the sub-receiver. It also displays the relative output power when the sub-band is selected for the transmission.
%1 C T
“T” appears when the Tone function of the sub­receiver is ON {page 33}. “C T” appears when the Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS) of the sub-receiver is ON {page 35}.
%2
Appears when the DSP Noise Reduction 1 of the sub­receiver is activated {page 56}.
%3 PKT
Appears when the internal TNC is operating in Packet mode {page 49}.
16
4 GETTING ACQUAINTED
%4 PC
Appears when the TS-2000(X) is being controlled by a PC {page 81}.
%5
The main transceiver operating frequency display.
%6
When the sub-receiver is switched ON, it shows the receive frequency for the sub-receiver. However, if you are controlling the main transceiver functions, such as RIT, XIT, or SPLIT, it is used to display the frequency information for these functions {page 45}.
%7 MAIN dot-matrix display In the normal operating mode, it displays the
operating mode for the main transceiver. It is also used to display various control information, such as menu numbers and settings and the DSP filter configuration.
%8 SUB dot-matrix display In the normal operating mode, it displays the
operating mode for the sub-receiver. It is also used to display various control information, such as menu information and the DSP filter frequency configuration.
MICROPHONE
q
DWN UP
w
PTT
q UP/ DWN keys Use these keys to step the VFO frequency, memory
channels, or Menu selections up and down. Press and hold these keys to continuously change the settings.
w PTT (Push-to-Talk) switch The transceiver is placed in transmit mode when this
non-locking switch is held down. Releasing the switch returns the transceiver to receive mode.
17
OPERATING BASICS
N
M
O
U
S
S
S
S
SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF
1 Switch the DC power supply ON. 2 Press and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly to switch
the transceiver ON.
Do not press the switch for more than approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver will be switched OFF.
Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed by the selected frequency and other indicators.
HF/VHE/UHF ALL M
MAIN
AUTO LSB
USB REV CW FSK NAR
FM
AM
CLR
SEL
1MHz
DISP
ME
CTRL
PF
ATT
LEVEL
VOX
SEND
F LOCK
A
PRE
LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
PF
F LOCK
A
A
T
T
P
R
E
L
E
V
E
L
L
E
V
E
L
V
O
X
P
R
O
C
A
N
T
1
/2
S
E
N
D
A
T
P
H
L
E
O
V
N
E
E
CH
L
S
1/REC
C
H2/REC
CH3/REC
N
1
.R
.
L
E
V
E
L
A .N
.
M
A
N
U
A
M
L
IC
B
.C
L
O
/
W
ID
T
CAR
2
3
C
TONE/SEL
M
ETER
N
MIC
CTCSS/SEL
U
4
F
5
TX MONI
6
NB/LEVEL
AGC/OFF
FINE/STEP
PWR
7
8
9
DELAY
D
C
S
/
S
E
L
.
S
H
I
F
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
KEY
0
EN
T
H
I/
H
S
H
IF
T
3 To switch the transceiver OFF, press [ ]
(POWER) again.
4 Switch the DC power supply OFF.
You may skip step 3. After switching the transceiver ON, you can switch it OFF or ON using only the power switch of the DC power supply. The transceiver stores the information of the POWER switch position when the DC power source is switched OFF.
ADJUSTING VOLUME
AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN
Turn the MAIN AF control clockwise to increase the audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the level.
MAIN
AF
SQL
TO B B
EL
1MHz
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
SUB
MENU
CALL
TF­SET
MAIN SUB
SG.SEL
M
SCAN
CTRL
M
Q
R
C.IN
M
/S
M
B
/
A
H
/C
O
F
V
/M
O
F
V
L
E
S
.
G
O
F
V
9.6k STA
CON
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
+
CLEAR P.C.T SET
H
C
I
IN
T
L
A
U
M
M
C
B
L
A
U
N
A
IN
M
A
G
F
R
O
M
E
M
K
C
I
U
N
I
.
M
L
T
A
S
V
E
R
N
I
IT
B
A
L
P
U
M
S
S
E
C
A
R
T
F
A
B
=
A
L
Q
S
N
I
.
M
RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN
Set the MAIN RF GAIN control fully clockwise. You may turn it counterclockwise slightly when you have trouble hearing the desired signal because of excessive atmospheric noise or interference from other stations. First take note of the peak S-meter reading of the desired signal. Then turn the MAIN RF GAIN control counterclockwise until the S-meter reads the peak value that you noted. Signals that are weaker than this level will be attenuated and reception of the station will become easier.
CON
MANUAL
BC
RF
MAIN
GAIN
TO B B
EL
1MHz
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
SUB
MENU
CALL
TF-
SET
MAIN SUB
SG.SEL
M
SCAN
CTRL
M
Q
R
C.IN
M
/S
M
/B
A
/CH
FO
V
/M
O
VF
L
E
.S
G
O
F
V
9.6k STA
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
+
CLEAR P.C. T SET
H
C
I
IN
T
L
A
U
M
M
BC
L
UA
N
A
IN
M
A
G
RF
O
M
E
M
K
IC
U
N
I
.
M
SATL
V
RE
IT
B
AIN
PL
U
M
S
S
E
C
RA
T
F
A
B
A=
L
SQ
N
I
.
M
Depending on the type and gain of your antenna, and the condition of the band, you may also prefer leaving the MAIN RF GAIN control turned counterclockwise by the same amount rather than turning it fully clockwise. When using FM mode, always set the MAIN RF GAIN control fully clockwise.
SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B
2 VFOs are available for controlling the frequency on the main transceiver. Each VFO, VFO A and VFO B, works independently so that a different frequency and mode can be selected. When SPLIT operation is activated, VFO A is used for reception and VFO B is used for transmission. The opposite combination is also possible.
Press [A/B] to toggle between VFO A and VFO B.
•“tA” or “tB” appears to indicate which VFO is selected.
9.6k STA
CON
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
+
CLEAR P.C. T SET
H
C
N
I
I
T
L
A
U
M
M
C
B
L
A
U
N
A
IN
M
A
G
F
R
O
M
E
M
K
C
I
U
Q
N
I
.
M
CALL
R
C.IN
M
L
T
A
S
V
E
R
/S
M
N
I
IT
B
A
L
P
U
M
S
B
/
A
H
/C
O
F
V
/M
O
F
V
L
E
S
.
G
M
O
F
V
M
S
E
C
A
R
T
F
A
B
=
A
L
Q
S
N
I
.
M
M/S
A/B
VFO/CH
VFO/M
TO B B
EL
1MHz
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
SUB
MENU
TF-
SET
MAIN SUB
SG.SEL
SCAN
CTRL
L
T
A
S
REV
SPLIT
TRACE
A=B
Note:
The position of the MAIN AF control does not affect the volume of beeps caused by pressing keys nor the CW transmit sidetone. The audio level for Packet operation is also independent of the MAIN AF control setting.
When the optional RC-2000 is installed, you can control the volume with the AF controls on both the transceiver and the RC-2000. However, when turning the transceiver on, the volume settings of the RC-2000 have priority.
SELECTING A BAND
Press [+] or [–] to select your desired band.
Holding down either key changes the bands continuously.
9.6k STA
CON
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
TO
MAIN
18
SUB
B B
EL
1MHz
SUB
MENU
TF-
SET
MAIN SUB
SG.SEL
SCAN
CTRL
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
+
CLEAR P.C. T SET
H
C
N
I
I
T
L
A
U
M
M
C
B
L
A
U
N
A
IN
M
A
G
F
R
O
M
E
M
K
IC
U
Q
N
I
.
M
CALL
R
C.IN
M
L
T
A
S
V
E
R
/S
M
IN
IT
B
A
L
P
U
M
S
B
/
A
H
/C
O
F
V
/M
O
F
V
L
E
S
.
G
M
O
F
V
M
S
E
C
A
R
T
F
A
B
=
A
L
Q
S
N
I
.
M
5 OPERATING BASICS
N
M
O
S
S
N
M
O
reteM ?derusaeMsItahW
S
slangisdeviecerfohtgnertS
RWP
rewoptuptuotimsnarT
CLA
sutatslortnoclevelcitamotuA
RWS
oitarevawgnidnatsmetsysannetnA
PMOC
gnisunehwlevelnoisserpmochceepS
}04egap{rossecorPhceepSeht
RETLIF
htdiwretlifPSD
SELECTING A MODE
Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO], [CW/ FSK/ REV], or [FM/ AM/ NAR]. To select the second mode on each
key, press the same key again. For example, each press of [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] toggles between LSB and USB mode.
REV CW
FSK
NAR
FM AM
AUTO LSB
USB
PF
F LOCK
A
A
T
T
P
R
E
L
E
V
E
L
L
E
V
E
L
V
O
X
P
R
O
C
A
N
T
1
/2
S
E
N
D
A
T
P
H
L
E
O
V
N
E
E
CH1/REC
L
S
CH2/REC
CH3/REC
N.R.
1
CAR
2
3
C
TONE/SEL
L
E
V
E
L
METER
N
MIC
CTCSS/SEL
U
4
A
F
5
.N
TX MONI
6
.
NB/LEVEL
AGC/OFF
M
FINE/STEP
A
N
U
A
M
L
IC
B.C
L
W
ID
PWR
7
8
9
DELAY
D
C
S
/S
E
L
.
S
H
IF
T
/
O
F
F
S
E
T
.
KEY
0
ENT
O
/
H
I/
T
H
S
H
IF
T
CLR
Press [FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to toggle the Auto Mode Selection for SSB. When it is active, “AUTO” appears. If you change the frequency above or below 9.5 MHz, the transceiver automatically switches modes; LSB for frequencies under 9.5 MHz and USB for frequencies equal to or above 9.5 MHz (HF/ 50 MHz band). As for the 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz bands, the transceiver automatically changes the operating mode to FM. You can further add the frequency table data to change the mode automatically {page 73}.
HF/VHE/UHF ALL M
MAIN
AUTO LSB
USB REV CW FSK NAR
FM
AM
SEL
1MHz
DISP
ME
CTRL
SELECTING A FREQUENCY
Turn the Tuning control clockwise or press Mic [UP] to increase the frequency. Turn the Tuning control counterclockwise or press Mic [DWN] to decrease the frequency.
CON
9.6k STA
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
TO B B
SEL
1MHz
CTRL
EL
1MHz
SUB
MENU
TF-
SET
MAIN SUB
SG.SEL
SCAN
CTRL
You may prefer directly entering a frequency using the numeric keypad if the desired frequency is far from the current frequency. Press [ENT], then press the numeric keys as necessary. For details, see “Direct Frequency Entry” {page 37}.
CH1/REC
CH2/REC
1
TONE/SEL
4
NB/LEVEL
7
D
C
S
/S
E
.
METER
AGC/OFF
L
S
H
IF
2
5 8
T/O
0
CH3/REC
CTCSS/SEL
FINE/STEP
F
F
S
E
T
3
6 9
ENT
PF
F LOCK
A
A
T
T
P
R
E
L
E
V
E
L
L
E
V
E
L
V
O
X
P
R
O
C
A
N
T
1/2
S
E
N
D
A
T
P
H
L
E
O
V
N
E
E
CH1/REC
L
S
CH2/REC
CH3/REC
N.R.
1
2
3
TONE/SEL
L
E
V
E
L
METER
CTCSS/SEL
4
A.N
5
6
.
NB/LEVEL
AGC/OFF
M
FINE/STEP
A
N
U
A
M
L
IC
7
8
B.C.
9
D
C
S
/S
E
L
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
0
ENT
L
O
/
H
I/
W
ID
T
H
S
H
IF
T
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
+
CLEAR P.C. T SET
CH
I
IN
T
L
A
U
M
M
BC
L
UA
AN
M
AIN
G
F
R
O
M
E
M
K
IC
U
Q
N
I
.
M
CALL
R
C.IN
M
SATL
V
E
R
/S
M
IT
B
AIN
PL
U
M
S
/B
A
H
/C
FO
V
/M
VFO
L
E
.S
G
M
O
F
V
M
MAIN
CAR
C N
MIC
U F
TX MONI PWR DELAY
KEY
CLR
DISP
S
E
AC
TR
F
A
=B
A
L
Q
S
N
I
.
M
HF/VHE/UHF ALL M
AUTO LSB
USB REV CW
FSK
NAR FM AM
SEL
1MHz
ME
CTRL
ADJUSTING SQUELCH
The purpose of the Squelch is to mute the speaker when no signals are present. With the squelch level correctly set, you will hear sound only while actually receiving signals. The higher the selected squelch level, the stronger the signals must be to receive. The appropriate squelch level depends on the ambient RF noise conditions.
Turn the MAIN SQL control, when there are no signals present, to select the squelch level at which the background noise is just eliminated; the MAIN band LED will turn off. Many ham operators prefer leaving the MAIN SQL control fully counterclockwise unless operating on a full-carrier mode such as FM. The squelch level for the main transceiver is preset at the factory to approximately 9 o’clock for FM and 11 o’clock for SSB and AM.
MAIN
AF
SQL
TO B B
EL
1MHz
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
SUB
MENU
CALL
TF­SET
MAIN SUB
SG.SEL
M
SCAN
CTRL
M
O
M
E
M
K
IC
U
Q
I
.
M
R
C.IN
M
SATL
E
R
/S
M
LIT
P
S
/B
A
A
TR
H
/C
O
F
V
=B
A
/M
O
F
V
L
E
.S
G
N
I
.
M
O
F
V
CON
9.6k STA
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
+
CLEAR P.C.T SET
H
C
I
IN
T
L
A
U
M
M
C
B
L
A
U
N
A
IN
M
A
G
F
R
N
V
IN
B
A
U
M
S
E
C
F
A
L
Q
S
This transceiver provides many other methods for quickly selecting a frequency. For further information, see “SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY” {page 37}.
FRONT PANEL METER
The multi-function meter measures the parameters in the table below. The S-meter and FILTER scales appear when the main transceiver is in receive mode, and the PWR meter appears when it is in transmit mode. Each press of [5/ METER] switches among the ALC, SWR, and COMP meters. Peak readings for the S-meter, ALC, SWR, COMP, and PWR functions are held momentarily.
Note:
The COMP meter functions only when the Speech Processor is ON for SSB, FM, or AM mode.
The PWR indicator shows the output power level as a percentage on the 1.2 GHz band.
The SWR meter works only for ANT 1 and ANT 2 (HF/ 50 MHz band).
Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.
19
5 OPERATING BASICS
N
M
O
N
M
O
S
N
M
O
S
TRANSMITTING
For voice communications, press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone in your normal tone of voice. When you finish speaking, press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].
To transmit CW, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the Break-in function ON, then close the key or keyer paddle. Connect a key or keyer paddle {pages 3, 39}, then select CW mode.
PF
ATT
LEVEL
VOX
SEND
F LOCK
A
PRE
LEVEL
PROC
ANT1/2
AT
PF
F LOCK
A
A
T
T
P
R
E
L
E
V
E
L
L
E
V
E
L
V
O
X
P
R
O
C
A
N
T
1
/2
S
E
N
D
A
T
P
H
L
E
O
V
N
E
E
CH1/REC
L
S
CH2/REC
CH3/R
EC
N
1
.R
.
L
E
V
E
L
A .N
.
M
A
N
U
A
M
L
IC
B
.C
L
O
/
W
ID
T
CAR
2
3
C
TONE/SEL
METER
N
MIC
CTCSS/SEL
U
4
F
5
TX MONI
6
NB/LEVEL
AG
C/OFF
F
INE/STEP
PWR
7
8
9
DELAY
D
C
S
/S
E
L
.
S
H
IF
T
/
O
F
F
S
E
T
.
KEY
0
EN
T
H
I/
H
S
H
IF
T
For a detailed explanation on transmitting, see “BASIC COMMUNICATIONS”, beginning on page 28.
Note: When using AM, CW, or FSK mode, you may adjust the carrier level. In general, adjust the level so that the ALC meter reads within the limits of the ALC zone. For the adjustment procedures, refer to the instructions for each mode in “TRANSMISSION” {pages 28, 29, 30}.
SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER
It is wise to select a lower transmit power if communication is still reliable. This lowers the risk of interfering with others on the band. When operating from battery power, selecting a lower transmit power allows you more operating time before a charge is necessary. This transceiver allows you to change the transmit power even while transmitting.
1 Press [PWR/ TX MONI].
The current transmit power appears.
CAR MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
KEY
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise to
reduce the power or clockwise to increase the power.
CH
MULTI
TO B B
EL
1MHz
PF
F LOCK
A
A
T
T
P
R
E
L
E
V
E
L
L
E
V
E
L
V
O
X
P
R
O
C
A
N
T
1
/2
S
E
N
D
A
T
P
H
L
E
O
V
N
E
E
C
L
S
H
1
N.R.
1
T
O
N
L
E
V
E
L
A.N.
N
B
/L
M
A
N
U
A
M
L
IC
B.C.
D
C
L
O
/
W
ID
T
H
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
CTRL
/R
E
C
C
H
2
/R
E
C
C
H
3
/R
E
C
CAR
2
3
C
E
/S
E
L
M
E
N
T
E
R
MIC
C
T
C
S
S
/S
E
L
4
FU
5
TX MONI
6
E
V
E
L
A
G
C
/O
F
F
F
IN
E
/S
T
E
PWR
P
7
8
9
DELAY
S
/
S
E
L
S
H
I
F
T
/
O
F
F
S
E
T
.
KEY
0
E
N
T
H
I/
S
H
IF
T
SUB
Q
MENU
CALL
R
C.IN
M
TF­SET
/S
M
/B
A
MAIN SUB
H
/C
O
F
V
/M
O
F
V
SG.SEL
L
E
.S
G
M
SCAN
O
F
V
M
HF/VHE/UHF ALL M
MAIN
AUTO LSB
USB REV CW FSK NAR
FM
AM
CLR
SEL
1MHz
DISP
MAIN
AUTO
LSB
USB REV CW FSK NAR
FM
AM
CLR
SEL
1MHz
DISP
U
N
A
M
O
M
E
M
K
IC
U
N
I
.
M
SATL
V
E
R
LIT
P
S
E
C
A
R
T
=B
A
N
I
.
M
ME
CTRL
HF/VHE/UHF ALL M
ME
CTRL
CON
9.6k STA
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
+
CLEAR P.C. T SET
H
C
I
IN
T
L
A
U
M
M
BC
L
A
IN
A
G
F
R
IN
B
A
U
M
S
F
A
L
Q
S
3 Press [PWR/ TX MONI] to complete the setting.
Note: You may access Menu No. 23, “FINE TRANSMIT POWER
TUNING”, and select “ON” (press [+]) to change the step size from 5 W to 1 W {page 79}.
MICROPHONE GAIN
The microphone gain must be adjusted when SSB or AM mode is used without speech processing {pages 28, 29}.
1 Press [MIC/ CAR].
The current microphone gain level appears. The default is 50; the range is from 0 to 100.
CAR
MIC
TX MONI
PWR
DELAY
PF
FLOCK
A
A
T
T
P
R
E
L
E
V
E
L
LE
V
E
L
V
O
X
P
R
O
C
A
N
T
1
/2
S
E
N
D
A
T
P
H
L
E
O
V
N
E
E
L
S
N.R.
L
E
V
E
L
A.N.
M
A
N
U
A
M
L
IC
B.C
.
LO
/
W
ID
T
H
MAIN
CH1/REC
CH2/REC
CH3/REC
1
CAR
2
3
C
TONE/SEL
M
ETER
N
MIC
CTCSS/SEL
U
4
F
5
TX MONI
6
NB/LEVEL
AGC/OFF
FINE/STEP
PWR
7
8
9
DELAY
D
C
S
/S
E
L
S
H
IF
T
/O
F
F
S
E
T
.
KEY
0
ENT
H
I/
S
H
IF
T
CLR
KEY
2 Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT].
The MAIN band LED lights red.
3 SSB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust
the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects your voice level, but does not exceed the ALC limit.
AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust the MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated power meter slightly reflects your voice level.
CW, FSK: While transmitting, adjust the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects the carrier level within the ALC zone.
MULTI
CH
TO B B
EL
1MHz
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
SUB
MENU
CALL
TF-
SET
MAIN SUB
SG.SEL
M
SCAN
CTRL
M
Q
R
C.IN
M
/S
M
B
/
A
H
/C
O
F
V
/M
O
F
V
L
E
S
.
G
O
F
V
4 Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT].
The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off, depending on the MAIN SQL control setting.
5 Press [MIC/ CAR]. For FM mode, access Menu No. 41 {page 28} and
select “LOW”, “MID”, or “HIGH” for the microphone gain.
Note: When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode, select “HIGH” for the microphone gain. The microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode. This may cause insufficient modulation. For other microphones, select either “LOW” or “MID”.
HF/VHE/UHF ALL M
AUTO LSB
USB REV CW
FSK
NAR FM AM
SEL
1MHz
DISP
U
N
A
M
O
M
E
M
K
C
I
U
N
I
.
M
L
T
A
S
V
E
R
IT
L
P
S
E
C
A
R
T
B
=
A
N
I
.
M
ME
CTRL
9.6k STA
CON
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
+
CLEAR P.C. T SET
H
C
N
I
I
T
L
A
U
M
M
C
B
L
A
IN
A
G
F
R
N
I
B
A
U
M
S
F
A
L
Q
S
The selectable range differs, depending on the current band and mode.
20
MENU SETUP
WHAT IS A MENU?
Many functions on this transceiver are selected or configured via a software-controlled Menu, rather than through the physical controls of the transceiver. Once familiar with the Menu system, you will appreciate the versatility it offers. You can customize the various timings, settings, and programming functions on this transceiver to meet your needs without using many controls and switches.
MENU A/ MENU B
This transceiver has two menus: Menu A and Menu B. These menus contain identical functions and can be configured independently. The transceiver, therefore, allows you to switch between two different environments quickly and easily. For example, you can configure Menu A for DXing and contesting while Menu B is for the relaxed local ragchewing. By switching from Menu A to Menu B, you can instantly change the Menu configuration and key assignment to suit your current operating style. Or, two operators may share a single transceiver by dedicating one Menu to each operator. Both operators can always enjoy their own configuration.
QUICK MENU
Because the number of functions this transceiver provides is extraordinary, there are numerous items in each Menu. If you find accessing desired Menu Nos. to be too time consuming, use the Quick Menu to create your own customized, abbreviated Menu. You can then add those Menu Nos. which you frequently use, to the Quick Menu. Copying Menu Nos. to the Quick Menu has no effect on the Menu.
PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU
1 Press [MENU]. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired
Menu No.
3 Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
A star appears, indicating that the Menu item has been added to the Quick Menu.
MENU ACCESS
1 Press [MENU].
The Menu No. and setting appear on the main dot-matrix display, and the explanation of the menu appears on the sub dot-matrix display.
2 Press [A/B] to select Menu A or Menu B.
“A” or “B” appears, indicating which Menu is selected.
3 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired
Menu No.
Each time you change the Menu No., a different scrolling message appears on the sub dot-matrix display, describing the Menu No.
You will see “PUSH SUB” if there are sub­menus in the Menu No. Pressing [SUB] allows you to select from among the sub-menus. Press [MAIN] to exit the sub-menu selection.
4 Press [+], [–], Mic [UP], or Mic [DWN] to select a
parameter.
5 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
To remove the item from the Quick Menu, press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] again.
4 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
Note: You cannot add a sub menu No. to the Quick Menu. Press [MAIN] to go back to the main menu No., then press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] to add the menu No. to the Quick Menu.
USING THE QUICK MENU
1 Press [MENU]. 2 Press [1MHz/ SEL].
“MHz” appears.
3 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired
Quick Menu No.
4 Press [+], [–], Mic [UP], or Mic [DWN] to change
the current setting for the selected Menu No.
5 Press [MENU] to exit Quick Menu mode.
Note: If the Quick Menu has not been programmed, turning the MULTI/ CH control in step 3 causes “CHECK” to be output in Morse
code.
21
6 MENU SETUP
MENU CONFIGURA TION
puorG
rotarepO
uneM
.oN
00
ssenthgirbyalpsiD
noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD
mumixam:4,muminim:1,FFO
4ot1/FFO357
.feR
gaPe
ecafretnI
10noitanimulliyeKFFO/NONO57 20noituloverrepegnahclortnocgninuT0001/005000183 30htiwgninuT HC/ITLUM lortnocFFO/NONO73
gninuT
lortnoC
40
eht HC/ITLUM lortnoc
50
ehtrofezispetsycneuqerfzHk9 HC/ITLUM
60lennahCyromeM
yromeM
lennahC
A60noitarepotilpsOFV-yromeMFFO/NOFFO06
B60
seicneuqerf
gnisuybdegnahcseicneuqerfOFVffosdnuoR
dnabtsacdaorbMAehtnoedomMAnilortnoc
lennahcyromem)FFO(dexifro)NO(elbanuT
FFO/NONO73
eeS
FFO/NO
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
ecnerefeR
egaP
––
FFO/NOFFO06
73
70dewolsyllaitrapnacsmargorPFFO/NONO76
80
nacs
margorPehtrofegnarycneuqerfnwodwolS
/004/003/002/001
zH005
zH00376
nacS
noitarepO
rotinoM
dnuoS
90dlohnacsmargorPFFO/NOFFO86
01dohtememusernacS
11egnarnacslausiV
21
31
41
51
OT
OC
leveltuptuopeeB
mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO
emulovenotedisXT
mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO
emulovkcabyalpA3-URD
mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO
emulovkcabyalp3-SV
mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO
)detarepO-emiT(
/
181/19/16/13
slennahc
)detarepO-reirraC(
OT86
16
slennahc
9ot1/FFO447
9ot1/FFO544
9ot1/FFO498
9ot1/FFO419
07
ro2PS.TXErofnoitarugifnoctuptuooiduA
enohpdaeh
0
rekaepS
tuptuO
1
61
niaM:)L(1PS
buS:)R(2PS
xiMbuS/niaM:)L(1PS xiMbuS/niaM:)R(2PS
2/1/0087
22
2
71
xiMbuS4/1+niaM:)L(1PS xiMniaM4/1+buS:)R(2PS
eht(2PS.TXEdna1PS.TXEehtsesreveR
stuptuooidua)slennahcR/Lkcajenohpdaeh
FFO/NOFFO87
6 MENU SETUP
puorG
annetnAXR81rotcennocTNAXRFHehtmorftupninaelbanEFFO/NOFFO67
retem-S
hcleuqS
PSD
rezilauqE
uneM
.oN
91hcleuqsretem-S
A91hcleuqsretem-SelbanEFFO/NOFFO87
B91hcleuqsretem-SrofemitgnaH
rezilauqeXRPSD
:FFOtalF
:TSOOBHtsoobhgiH
02
12
:SSAPFssaptnamroF
:TSOOBBtsoobssaB
:NEVNOClanoitnevnoC
:RESU)erawtfosPCRArofdevreseR(talF
rezilauqeXTPSD
:FFOtalF
:TSOOBHtsoobhgiH
:SSAPFssaptnamroF
:TSOOBBtsoobssaB
:NEVNOClanoitnevnoC
:RESU)erawtfosPCRArofdevreseR(talF
noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
005/052/521/FFO
sm
F/TSOOBH/FFO
/TSOOBB/SSAP
RESU/NEVNOC
F/TSOOBH/FFO
/TSOOBB/SSAP
RESU/NEVNOC
.feR egaP
––
FFO87
FFO
FFO
,87
401
,14
401
retliFPSD22MAroBSSrofhtdiwdnabretlifXTPSD
gninuTeniF32gninutrewoptimsnarteniFFFO/NOFFO83
TOT42remittuo-emiT
retrevsnarT52yalpsidycneuqerfretrevsnarTNO/FFOFFO97
annetnA
renuT
raeniL
reifilpmA
62gninutehtsetelpmocTAnehwdlohXTNO/FFOFFO37 72gniviecerelihwTAenil-nINO/FFOFFO37
82lortnocreifilpmaraeniL
A82dnabFHrofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67 B82dnabzHM05rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67
C82dnabzHM441rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67
D82
E82dnabzHG2.1rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67
92kcabyalpegassemWCdnaecioV
dnab
zHM)044(034rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL
zHk0.3
setunim
/8.2/6.2/4.2/2.2/0.2
03/02/01/5/3/FFO
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
2/1/FFOFFO67
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
zHk4.2
14
FFO87
––
––
egasseM
kcabyalP
A92kcabyalpehttaepeRNO/FFOFFO
B92kcabyalpehtgnitaeperrofemitlavretnI
sdnoces06ot0
)dnoces1fospetsni(
,44
09
,44
.ces01
09
23
6 MENU SETUP
puorG
uneM
.oN
noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD
.feR egaP
03kcabyalprevoytiroirpgniyeKNO/FFOFFO44 13ycneuqerfenotedisXT/hctipXRWC
zH0001ot004
)zH05fospetsni(
zH00803
23emitesirWCsm6/4/2/1sm677
WC
33oitarthgiewhsad,todgniyekWC
0.4ot5.2/OTUA )1.0fospetsni(
OTUA24
43oitarthgiewotuagniyekWCesreveRNO/FFOFFO24 53edomyekguBNO/FFOFFO34 63edomBSSniXTWCotuANO/FFOFFO44 73WCotBSSgnignahcrofnoitcerrocycneuqerFNO/FFOFFO44 83tfihsKSF
KSF
93ytiralopgniyekKSFSREVNI/LAMRON
zH058/524/002/071
04ycneuqerfenotKSFzH5212/5721
zH07115
LAMRON zH5212
15 15
14MFrofniagciMHGIH/DIM/WOLWOL02
eeS
ecnerefer
MF
egap
24MFrofedomenot-buSTNOC/TSRUB
33
34tesfforetaeperotuANO/FFONO43 44enotzH0571:dlohXTNO/FFOFFO33
54snoitcnufFMTD
A54tcelesyromemrebmunFMTD
FMTD
B54rebmunFMTDderotsrofdeepsXTTSAF/WOLSTSAF67
C54rebmunFMTDderotsrofnoitarudesuaP
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
/057/005/052/001
sm0002/0051/0001
––
––
sm00567
D54lortnocetomerciMelbanENO/FFOFFO18
64CNTlanretnI:dnabBUS/NIAMBUS/NIAMBUS05
spb0021
74CNTlanretnI:deepsrefsnartataDspb0069/0021 84dnabgnisnesDCD
94edom)enuTretsulCtekcaP(.T.C.P
/DNABCNT
BUS&NIAM
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
CNT
dnab
––
A94edomenuTretsulCtekcaPOTUA/LAUNAM B94enotnoitamrifnocXRretsulCtekcaPECIOV/ESROM/FFO
CNT
05noitarugifnoctekcaP
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
––
05 05
LAUNAM
35
ESROM
35
A05htdiwdnabretliftekcaPNO/FFOFFO05
24
B05tekcaProfleveltupniFA)1fospetsni(9ot0405 C05noitarepotekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabNIAM)1fospetsni(9ot0405 D05noitarepotekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabBUS)1fospetsni(9ot0405
E05CNTlanretxE:dnabBUS/NIAMBUS/NIAMNIAM05
F05CNTlanretxE:deepsrefsnartataDspb0069/0021
spb0021
05
6 MENU SETUP
puorG
uneM
.oN
15tnemngissayekFP
noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
––
.feR egaP
/.R.N/.C.B/.N.A/FFO
/zHM1/2/1TNA/BN
/RLC/LLAC/LRTC
/2HC/3HC/ENIF
/ENUTWC/1HC
A15yekFPlenaptnorF
/OFVM/NI.M
/M/OFV/B=A/NACS
1ECIOV77
/TILPS/TES-FT/B/A
syekFP
PSD/RMQ/NI.MQ
/INOMXR/INOM
/1ECIOV/2ECIOV
26-00UNEM
B15yek)FP(1FPenohporciMA15saemaSB/A77 C15yek)RM(2FPenohporciMA15saemaSTILPS77
M/OFV
D15yek)OFV(3FPenohporciMA15saemaS
E15yek)LLAC(4FPenohporciMA15saemaS
XR
77
77
INOM
25
evalS/retsaM
noitarepo
35
noitarepo
.sOFVtegratehtot
evals/retsamnirefsnartycneuqerftilpS
seicneuqerftilpSderrefsnartehtetirwottimreP
NO/FFOFFO08
NO/FFOFFO08
tibihnIXT45tibihniXTNO/FFOFFO14
55edomnoitacinummoctekcaPNO/FFOFFO94
tekcaP
65deepsnoitacinummoctropMOC
OPA75noitcnuf)ffOrewoPotuA(OPA
/00291/0069/0084
spb00675/00483 081/021/06/FFO
setunim
85edomnoitarepoysaenitnof0002-CR2TNOF/1TNOF1TNOF89
0002-CR
95
noitarugifnoC
tsartnoc
060002-CRrofedomyalpsiD
16noitcnufretaepeR
A16tcelesedomretaepeR
0002-ST
retaepeR
B16dlohXTretaepeRNO/FFOFFO88
yalpsidxirtam-tod)X(0002-ST/lenap0002-CR
)1fospetsni(61ot1857
/EVITAGEN
EVITISOP
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
/DEKCOL/FFO
SSORC
snoitcnuF
C16edocDIlortnocetomeR999ot00000028
)ylnOepyt-K(
0069
spb
05
FFO27
EVITISOP
89
––
FFO88
D16
edomlortnoc
etomerlanretxenilangistnemegdelwonkcA
NO/FFOFFO28
E16lortnocetomerlanretxENO/FFOFFO28
25
6 MENU SETUP
noitcnuF
uneM
.oN
RETLIFPSD
rezilauqeXRPSD02
rezilauqeXTPSD12
MAroBSSrofhtdiwdnabretlifXTPSD22
FMTD
tcelesyromemrebmunFMTDA54
rebmunFMTDderotsrofnoitarudesuaPC54
rebmunFMTDderotsrofdeepsXTB54
MF
tesfforetaeperotuA34
edomMFrofhcleuqsretem-SelbanEA91
hcleuqsretem-SrofemitgnaHB91
MFrofniagciM14
MFrofedomenot-buS24
enotzH0571:dlohXT44
KSF
ytiralopgniyekKSF93
tfihsKSF83
ycneuqerfenotKSF04
DCL
ssenthgirbyalpsiD00
noitanimulliyeK10
xirtam-tod)X(0002-ST/lenap0002-CR
tsartnocyalpsid
95
NOITCNUFYROMEM
noitarepotilpsOFV-yromeMA60
lennahcyromem)FFO(dexifro)NO(elbanuT
seicneuqerf
B60
puorG
ykS
+IIdnammoC
)ylnOepyt-K(
uneM
.oN
26noitarugifnoc+IIdnammoCykS
A26+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacrednammoC
B26+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacretropsnarT
C26ycneuqerfenot+IIdnammoCykSsenotSSCTC83 D26deepsnoitacinummoc+IIdnammoCykSspb0069/0021
E26edom+IIdnammoCykS
ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST
noitcnuF
REIFILPMA
noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD
sseccaotBUSsserP
unem-buseht
ehtrofngisllacatupnI
rednammoC
ehtrofngisllacatupnI
retropsnarT
/TNEILC/FFO
/DNAMMOC
RETROP-T
uneM
.oN
.feR egaP
––
ON
ON
0021
spb
FFO38
38
LLAC
38
LLAC
zH5.88
38 38
dnab
rotcennoc
WC
noitarepo
rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL
dnabzHM)044(034
ANNETNA
gniviecerelihwTAenil-nI72
leveltuptuopeeB21
WC
edomBSSniXTWCotuA63
edomyekguB53
emitesirWC23
kcabyalprevoytiroirpgniyeK03
TNAXRFHehtmorftupninaelbanE
RENUTANNETNA
gninutehtsetelpmocTAnehwdlohXT62
NOITCNUFPEEB
oitarthgiewhsad,todgniyekWC33
ycneuqerfenotedisXT/hctipXRWC13
oitarthgiewotuagniyekWCesreveR43 REFSNARTATAD tilpSderrefsnartehtetirwottimreP
.sOFVtegratehtotseicneuqerf
evals/retsamnirefsnartycneuqerftilpS
dnabFHrofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniLA82
dnabzHM05rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniLB82
zHM441rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL
dnabzHG2.1rofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniLE82
otBSSgnignahcrofnoitcerrocycneuqerF
C82
D82
81
73
35
25
26
6 MENU SETUP
noitcnuF
uneM
.oN
CNT
tekcaProfleveltupniFAB05
deepsnoitacinummoctropMOC65
CNTlanretxE:deepsrefsnartataDF05
CNTlanretnI:deepsrefsnartataD74
dnabgnisnesDCD84
tekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabniaM
noitarepo
C05
CNTlanretxE:dnabBUS/NIAME05
CNTlanretnI:dnabBUS/NIAM64
edomnoitacinummoctekcaP55
htdiwdnabretliftekcaPA05
enotnoitamrifnocXRretsulCtekcaPB94
edomenuTretsulCtekcaPA94
noitarepotekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabbuSD05
LORTNOCNOISSIMSNART
remiTtuo-emiT42
tibihniXT45
RETREVSNART
yalpsidycneuqerfretrevsnarT52
LORTNOCGNINUT
otBSSgnignahcrofnoitcerrocycneuqerF
WC
73
ehtrofezispetsycneuqerfzHk9 HC/ITLUM
tsacdaorbMAehtnoedomMAnilortnoc
dnab
50
ybdegnahcseicneuqerfOFVffosdnuoR
ehtgnisu HC/ITLUM lortnoc
40
noituloverrepegnahclortnocgninuT20
htiwgninuT HC/ITLUM lortnoc30
LORTNOCEMULOV
leveltuptuopeeB21
emulovkcabyalpA3-URD41
emulovenotedisXT31
emulovkcabyalp3-SV51
noitcnuF
KCABYALPEGASSEM
kcabyalpehtgnitaeperrofemitlavretnIB92
kcabyalpehttaepeRA92
SYEKFP
yekFPlenaptnorFA15
yek1FPenohporciMB15 yek2FPenohporciMC15 yek3FPenohporciMD15 yek4FPenohporciME15
LORTNOCREWOP
gninutrewoptimsnarteniF32
FFO/NOREWOP
noitcnuf)ffOrewoPotuA(OPA75
LORTNOCETOMER
tsartnocyalpsid
edomlortnoc
dlohXTretaepeRB16
dlohnacsmargorP90
nacs
enohpdaeh
egnarnacslausiV11
lortnocetomerciMelbanED54
0002-CRrofedomyalpsiD06
edomnoitarepoysaenitnof0002-CR85
xirtam-tod)X(0002-ST/lenap0002-CR
lortnocetomerlanretxEE16
edocDIlortnocetomeRC16
tcelesedomretaepeRA16
dohtememusernacS01
edom+IIdnammoCykSE26
RETAEPER
NACS
edomnwodwolshtiwnacsmargorP70
+IIDNAMMOCYKS
ycneuqerfenot+IIdnammoCykSC26
REKAEPS
etomerlanretxenilangistnemegdelwonkcA
margorPehtrofegnarycneuqerfnwodwolS
+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacrednammoCA26
deepsnoitacinummoc+IIdnammoCykSD26
+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacretropsnarTB26
ro2PS.TXErofnoitarugifnoctuptuooiduA
eht(2PS.TXEdna1PS.TXEehtsesreveR
stuptuooidua)slennahcR/Lkcajenohpdaeh
uneM
.oN
95
D16
80
61
71
27
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SSB TRANSMISSION
SSB is the most commonly-used mode on the HF Amateur bands. Compared with other voice modes, SSB requires only a narrow bandwidth for communications. SSB also allows long distance communications with minimum transmit power.
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”, beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1 Select an operating frequency. 2 Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to select either lower or
upper sideband mode.
“LSB” or “USB” appears to show which sideband is selected.
3 Press [MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone
Gain Adjust.
The current gain level appears.
FM TRANSMISSION
FM is a common mode for communicating on VHF or UHF frequencies. Many amateur radio operators use their portable radios and mobile transceivers in FM mode. You can also utilize repeaters to reach your friends when they are outside your antenna coverage. Although FM requires a wider bandwidth when compared to SSB or AM mode, it has the finest audio quality among these modes. When combined with the full-quieting aspect of FM signals, which suppress background noise on the frequency, FM can be the best method for maintaining regular schedules with your local friends.
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”, beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1 Select an operating frequency. 2 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.
“FM” appears.
4 Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].
The MAIN band LED lights red.
Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on automatic TX/RX switching.
5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the
MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects
your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit.
Speak in your normal tone and level of voice. Speaking too close to the microphone or too loudly may increase distortion and reduce intelligibility at the receiving end.
You may want to use the Speech Processor. Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 40} for details.
6 Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to
receive mode.
The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off, depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
7 Press [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain
Adjust.
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on page 37, for information on additional useful operation functions.
3 Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].
The MAIN band LED lights red.
Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on automatic TX/RX switching.
4 Speak into the microphone in your normal tone
and level of voice.
Speaking too close to the microphone or too loudly may increase distortion and reduce intelligibility at the receiving end.
You can switch the Microphone Gain for FM between “LOW”, “MID”, and “HIGH” by using Menu No. 41. “LOW” is usually appropriate; however, select high if other stations report that your modulation is weak. The MULTI/ CH control has no effect in FM mode.
5 Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to
receive mode.
The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off, depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on page 37, for additional information on useful operation functions.
28
7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
edoM retliFFIXR noitaiveDXT
MFediWediW
NMFworraN
1
worraN
AM TRANSMISSION
Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its own advantages. Although long distance DX contacts may be less common while using AM, the superior audio quality characteristic of AM operation is one reason why some hams prefer this mode.
When looking for others operating on AM, check the following frequencies first:
3885 kHz, 7290 kHz, 14286 kHz, 21390 kHz, and 29000 ~ 29200 kHz
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”, beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1 Select an operating frequency. 2 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select AM mode.
“AM” appears.
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM
When operating in FM mode, you can select wide or narrow bandwidth operation. The table below shows the RX IF filter bandwidth and TX deviation combination for each operating mode. The bandwidth selection is crucial to avoid audio distortion or insufficient intelligibility that the other station will encounter.
1
K-type: Main transceiver only. All E-types: Main transceiver and sub-receiver.
1 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode. 2 Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the
selection between Wide and Narrow.
“FM” or “FMN” appears to indicate which bandwidth is selected.
3 Press [MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone
Gain Adjust.
The current gain level appears.
4 Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].
The MAIN band LED lights red.
Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on automatic TX/RX switching.
5 Speak into the microphone and adjust the
MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated power
meter slightly reflects your voice level.
Speak in your normal tone and level of voice. Speaking too close to the microphone or too loudly may increase distortion and reduce intelligibility at the receiving end.
You may want to use the Speech Processor. Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 40} for details.
6 Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to
receive mode.
The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off, depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
7 Press [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain
Adjust.
Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on page 37, for information on additional useful operation functions.
NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM
When receiving AM on the main transceiver, you can further decrease the bandwidth to eliminate interference. However, the TX deviation of AM is not affected by this selection.
1 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select AM mode on the
main transceiver.
2 Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the
selection between Normal and Narrow.
“AM” or “AMN” appears to indicate which IF bandwidth is selected for the main transceiver.
Note: If necessary, adjust the carrier level before speaking into the microphone. Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment mode. While transmitting only carrier signals, turn the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter just begins to indicate. Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] again to complete the adjustment.
29
7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
CW TRANSMISSION
CW operators know that this mode is very reliable when communicating under worst conditions. It may be true that newer digital modes rival CW as being equally as useful in poor conditions. These modes, however, do not have the long history of service nor the simplicity that CW provides.
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that supports a variety of functions. For details on using these functions, refer to “ELECTRONIC KEYER” {page 42}.
If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”, beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.
1 Select the operating frequency. 2 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
“CW” appears.
To precisely tune in another station, use Auto Zero-beat. Refer to “AUTO ZERO-BEAT” {below}.
3 Press [SEND].
The MAIN band LED lights red.
Refer to “CW BREAK-IN” {page 42} for information on automatic TX/ RX switching.
4 Begin sending.
As you transmit, you should hear a sidetone that lets you monitor your own transmission. Refer to “TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY” {below}.
5 Press [SEND] to return to receive mode.
The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off, depending on the MAIN SQL setting.
Note: You may adjust the carrier level when necessary. Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment mode. With the key
down, turn the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reads within the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit. Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] again to complete the adjustment.
AUTO ZERO-BEAT
Use Auto Zero-beat before transmitting to tune in a CW station. Auto Zero-beat automatically and exactly matches your transmit frequency with the station you are receiving. Neglecting to do this will reduce your chances of being heard by the other station.
1 Press [FUNC], [RIT/ CW TUNE] to start Auto
Zero-beat.
“CW TUNE” appears.
Your transmit frequency automatically changes so that the pitch of the received signal exactly matches the TX sidetone/ RX pitch frequency that you have selected. Refer to “TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY” {below}.
When matching is completed, “CW TUNE” disappears.
If matching is unsuccessful, the previous frequency is restored.
2 To quit Auto Zero-beat, press [FUNC],
[RIT/ CW TUNE] or [CLR].
Note:
You cannot start Auto Zero-beat if you have selected 1.0 kHz or wider for the DSP filter bandwidth.
When using Auto Zero-beat, the matching error is within ±50 Hz in most cases.
Auto Zero-beat may fail if the keying speed of the target station is too slow or when some interference is present.
When RIT function is ON, only RIT frequencies change to make the Auto Zero-beat adjustment.
TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY
As you send CW, you will hear tones from the transceiver speaker. These are called transmit (TX) sidetones. Listening to these tones, you can monitor what you are transmitting. You may also use the tones to ensure that your key contacts are closing, the keyer is functioning, or to practice sending without actually putting a signal on the air.
Receive pitch refers to the frequency of CW that you hear after tuning in a CW station.
On this transceiver, the frequency of the sidetone and receive pitch are equal and selectable. Access Menu No. 31 to select the frequency that is most comfortable for you. The selectable range is from 400 Hz to 1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz.
To change the volume of the TX sidetone, access Menu No. 13. The selections range from 1 to 9 and OFF.
30
Note: The position of the MAIN AF and SUB AF controls do not affect the volume of the TX sidetone.
ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION
Usually you can communicate with other stations using a single frequency for receiving and transmitting. In this case, you select only one frequency on either VFO A or VFO B. However, there are cases where you must select one frequency for receiving and a different frequency for transmitting. This requires the use of two VFOs. This is referred to as “split-frequency operation”. One typical case which requires this type of operation is when you use an FM repeater {page 32}. Another typical case is when you call a rare DX station.
When a rare or desirable DX station is heard, that operator may immediately get many simultaneous responses. Often, such a station is lost under the noise and confusion of many calling stations. If you find that you are suddenly being called by many operators, it is your responsibility to control the situation. You may announce that you will be “listening up 5 (kHz, from your present transmit frequency)”, or “listening down between 5 and 10 (kHz)”.
1 Press [MAIN], [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B on
the main transceiver.
•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected.
2 Select an operating frequency.
The frequency selected at this point will be used for transmitting.
To copy the selected VFO frequency to the other VFO, press [A=B].
3 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO. 4 Select an operating frequency.
The frequency selected on this VFO will be used for receiving.
5 Press [SPLIT].
“SPLIT” appears.
Each press of [A/B] reverses the receive and transmit frequencies.
6 To quit split-frequency operation, press [SPLIT]
again.
“SPLIT” disappears.
If you access Menu No. 06A and select “ON”, you can recall a memory channel to use for either receiving or transmitting. For more information, refer to “Memory­VFO Split Operation” {page 60} under “MEMORY FEATURES”.
TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET)
TF-SET allows you to temporarily switch your transmit frequency and receive frequency . Canceling this function immediately restores the original transmit and receive frequencies. By activating TF-SET, you can listen on your transmit frequency, and change it while listening. This allows you to check whether or not the newly selected transmit frequency is free of interference.
1 Configure split-frequency operation as explained
in the previous section.
2 Press and hold [TF-SET]. 3 While holding down [TF-SET], change the
operating frequency by turning the Tuning control or by pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN].
The transceiver receives on the frequency that you select, but the frequency shown on the sub-display stays unchanged.
4 Release [TF-SET].
You are now receiving again on your original receive frequency.
Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup often depends on making a well-timed call on a clear frequency. That is, it is important to select a relatively clear transmit frequency and to transmit at the exact instant when the DX station is listening but the majority of the group aren’t transmitting. Switch your receive and transmit frequencies by using TF-SET and listen. You will soon learn the rhythm of the DX station and the pileup. The more proficient you become at using this function, the more DX stations you will contact.
Note:
If you press [FUNC], [A TT/ F LOCK] to lock the operating frequency before using TF-SET, pressing an incorrect button by mistake retains the original receive frequency.
TF-SET is disabled while transmitting.
If you have recalled a memory channel (excluding CH 290 to
299), you cannot change the recalled frequency using the
Tuning control.
To enable the Tuning control, access Menu No. 06B and select “ON”. Pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN] after recalling a memory channel changes the memory channels.
An RIT frequency shift is not added; however, an XIT frequency shift is added to the transmit frequency.
Note: You cannot perform SPLIT operation on the sub-receiver; it has only one VFO.
31
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
FM REPEATER OPERATION
When using FM mode, you may access a repeater to enjoy long distance communications. Repeaters, which are often installed and maintained by radio clubs, are usually located on mountain tops or other elevated locations. Generally they operate at higher ERP (Effective Radiated Power) than a typical station. This combination of elevation and high ERP allows communications in FM over much greater distances than FM communications without using repeaters.
Most repeaters use a receive and transmit frequency pair with an offset. In addition, some repeaters must receive a tone from the transceiver before it allows access. Repeaters are available on the 29, 50, 144, 430 (440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz bands (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional). For further information, including repeater frequencies, consult your local repeater reference.
This transceiver provides the following three methods for programming two separate frequencies:
Using the Split-Frequency function {page 31}
Programming an offset (29, 50, 144, 430 (440) MHz and 1.2 GHz bands)
Storing in a Split-Frequency channel {page 59}
Note:
When programming two separate frequencies using two VFOs, be sure to select FM mode on both VFOs.
When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused by speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your signal to “talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.
Selecting an Offset Direction
1 Select a receive frequency. 2 Press [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] to switch the offset
direction.
Select whether the transmit frequency will be higher (+) or lower (–) than the receive frequency.
“+” or “–” appears to indicate which offset direction is selected.
To program the –7.6 MHz (430 MHz) or –6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz) offset on all E-types, repeatedly press [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] until “=” appears.
If the offset transmit frequency falls outside the allowable range, transmitting is inhibited. Use one of the following methods to bring the transmit frequency within the band limits:
Move the receive frequency further inside the band.
Change the offset direction.
Note:
You can only change the offset direction while in FM mode.
While using an odd-split memory channel for transmitting, you cannot change the offset direction.
29.520 MHz
88.5 Hz
29.620 MHz
29.620 MHz
29.520 MHz
88.5 Hz
PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET
When using the 29, 50, 144, 430 (440) MHz or 1.2 GHz band (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional), selecting a single frequency and an offset is another method for programming two separate frequencies. Unlike the Split-Frequency function, this method requires only a single VFO.
Note: If you store offset settings in a memory channel, you need not reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES” {page 58}.
Selecting an Offset Frequency
To access a repeater which requires an odd-split frequency pair, change the offset frequency from the default which is used by most repeaters. The default offset frequencies are as follows.
dnaB epyt-K sepyt-EllA
zHM441 ± zHk006
zHM)044(034 ± zHM0.5
zHG2.1 ± zHM0.21
± zHM6.1
± zHM0.53
As for the 29 and 50 MHz bands, the default offset is set to 0 MHz (Simplex). Program the desired offset frequency for these bands.
1 Press [FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET]. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the
appropriate offset frequency.
The selectable range is from 0.00 MHz to
59.95 MHz in steps of 50 kHz.
3 Press [FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] again to
complete the setting.
All E-types only: If you have selected “ =” for the offset direction, you cannot change the default (–7.6 MHz or –6.0 MHz).
zHM6.7
zHM0.6
32
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSMITTING A TONE
Some FM repeaters require the transceiver to transmit a sub-audible tone to prevent other repeaters on the same frequency from locking each other up. The required tone frequency differs among repeaters. Repeaters also differ in their requirements for either continuous or burst tones. For the appropriate selections for your accessible repeaters, consult your local repeater reference.
After completing the tone settings, pressing [SEND] or pressing and holding Mic [PTT] causes the transceiver to transmit the selected tone. If you have selected a 1750 Hz tone, press [4/ TONE/SEL] to transmit the tone without pressing [PTT].
Note: If you store tone settings in a memory channel, you need not reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES” {page 58}.
Activating the Tone Function
1 Confirm that FM mode has been selected on
the VFO(s).
When using two VFOs, you must select FM mode on both VFOs.
2 Press [4/ TONE/SEL] to switch the Tone
function ON (or OFF).
“T” appears when the function is ON.
.oN
.qerF
.oN
)zH(
.qerF
.oN
)zH(
.qerF
.oN
)zH(
100.76114.79125.631138.291
209.17210.001223.141235.302
304.47315.301322.641337.012
400.77412.701424.151431.812
507.97519.011527.651537.522
605.28618.411622.261636.332
704.58718.811729.761738.142
805.88810.321828.371833.052
905.19913.721929.971930571
018.49028.131032.681
Note:
Use Nos. 01 to 39 shown in the table above when selecting tone frequencies via Wireless Remote Control {page 82}.
You can select a tone frequency independent of a CTCSS frequency.
Selecting Continuous or Burst
Access Menu No. 42 to select “Continuous” or “Burst”. With Continuous selected, the transceiver sends the tone continuously during the transmission. With Burst selected, the transceiver sends a 500 ms tone each time transmission starts. When using the 144, 430 (440) MHz, or
1.2 GHz band, continuous tones are always transmitted, regardless of the selection.
.qerF
)zH(
Note:
You cannot use the Tone function with the CTCSS or DCS functions.
You need to activate the Tone function only when selecting one of the 38 standard frequencies. The selection you make here will not affect the transmission of the 1750 Hz tone.
Selecting a Tone Frequency
1 Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL].
The current tone frequency appears. The default is 88.5 Hz.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the
appropriate tone frequency.
The available tone frequencies are listed in the following table.
3 Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL] to complete the
setting.
Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone
Most repeaters in Europe require transceivers to transmit a 1750 Hz tone. With 1750 Hz tone selected, pressing [4/ TONE/SEL] causes the transceiver to transmit the 1750 Hz tone. Releasing the key ceases transmission of the code. Some repeaters in Europe must receive continuous signals for a certain period of time, following a 1750 Hz tone. This transceiver is capable of remaining in transmit mode for 2 seconds after transmitting the 1750 Hz tone. Access Menu No. 44 and select “ON”.
33
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET
This function automatically selects an offset direction, according to the frequency that you select on the 144 MHz band. The transceiver is programmed for offset directions as shown below. To obtain an up-to­date band plan for repeater offset direction, contact your national Amateur Radio association.
Access Menu No. 43 and switch the function ON or OFF. The default is ON.
K-type (U.S.A. and Canada versions)
This complies with the standard ARRL band plan.
144.0 145.5 146.4 147.0 147.6
145.1 146.0 146.6 147.4 148.0 MHz
+
SS
S: Simplex
All E-types (European versions)
144.0
S: Simplex
Note:
Automatic Repeater Offset does not function when Reverse is ON. However, pressing [TF-SET] after Automatic Repeater Offset has selected an offset (split) status, exchanges the receive and transmit frequencies.
If you change the offset direction by pressing [0/ SHIFT/ OFFSET] when Automatic Repeater Offset is ON, the Shift
direction on the above figure is applied when you change the frequencies.
S
S
+
S
146.0 MHz145.8145.6
S
REVERSE FUNCTION
AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)
ASC functions only when you have programmed an offset on the 29, 50, 144, 430 (440) MHz or 1.2 GHz (Optional) band. While using a repeater, ASC periodically monitors the strength of a signal that you receive directly from the other station. If the station’s signal is strong enough to allow direct contact without a repeater, the ASC indicator on the display starts to blink.
Press and hold [TF-SET] for approximately 1 second to switch the function ON.
The “[R]” indicator appears when the function is ON.
When direct contact is possible, the “[R]” indicator blinks.
To quit the function, press [TF-SET].
Note:
Pressing Mic [PTT] causes the ASC indicator to stop blinking.
ASC does not function if your transmit and receive frequencies are the same (simplex operation).
ASC does not function while scanning.
Activating ASC while using Reverse switches Reverse OFF.
If you recall a memory channel or the Call channel that has the Reverse status ON, ASC is switched OFF.
ASC causes received audio to be momentarily intermitted every 3 seconds.
After programming an offset on the 29, 50, 144, 430 (440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz (Optional) band, the reverse function exchanges a separate receive and transmit frequency. So, while using a repeater, you can manually check the strength of a signal that you receive directly from the other station. If the station’s signal is strong, both stations should move to a simplex frequency to free up the repeater.
Press [TF-SET] to switch the Reverse function ON (or OFF) while the Shift function is active.
“R” appears when the Reverse function is ON.
Note:
If you press [TF-SET] and try to transmit outside the available transmission frequency, the transceiver will become inhibited and you cannot transmit.
If you press [TF-SET] and try to receive outside the available receive frequency, the transceiver will not allow you to tune the frequency. The Reverse function will not operate.
Automatic Repeater Offset does not function while Reverse is ON.
You cannot switch Reverse ON or OFF while transmitting.
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN
This function scans through all tone frequencies to identify the incoming tone frequency on a received signal. You can use this function to find which tone frequency is required by your local repeater.
1 Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL].
The current tone frequency appears.
2 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the Tone
Freq. ID.
“T” blinks and every Tone frequency is
scanned. When the Tone frequency is identified, the transceiver stops scanning and the identified frequency is displayed.
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to resume
scanning.
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while
the Tone frequency ID scan is active.
34
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
FM CTCSS OPERATION
You may sometimes want to hear calls only from specific persons. When using FM mode, the Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS) allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls from other persons who are using the same frequency. A CTCSS tone is sub-audible and is selectable from among the 38 standard tone frequencies. Select the same CTCSS tone as the other stations in your group. You will not hear calls from stations other than those using the same CTCSS tone.
Note: CTCSS does not cause your conversation to be private. It only relieves you from listening to unwanted conversations.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected.
2 Select a band. 3 Select an operating frequency. 4 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.
“FM” appears.
5 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch. 6 Press [6/ CTCSS/SEL] to switch the CTCSS
function ON (or OFF).
“CT” appears when the function is ON.
.oN
.qerF
.oN
)zH(
.qerF
.oN
)zH(
.qerF
.oN
)zH(
100.76114.79125.631138.291
209.17210.001223.141235.302
304.47315.301322.641337.012
400.77412.701424.151431.812
507.97519.011527.651537.522
605.28618.411622.261636.332
704.58718.811729.761738.142
805.88810.321828.371833.052
905.19913.721929.971
018.49028.131032.681
You will hear calls only when the selected tone is received. To answer the call, press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone.
Skip steps 7 and 8 if you have already programmed the appropriate CTCSS frequency.
Note:
When using split-frequency operation, select FM mode on both VFOs to use CTCSS.
Use Nos. 01 to 38 shown in the table above when selecting CTCSS frequencies via Wireless Remote Control {page 82}.
You can select a CTCSS frequency independent of a tone frequency.
You cannot use the CTCSS function with the Tone or DCS functions.
.qerF
)zH(
7 Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/SEL].
The current CTCSS frequency appears. The default CTCSS frequency is 88.5 Hz.
8 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the
appropriate CTCSS frequency.
The selectable CTCSS frequencies are listed in the following table.
9 Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/SEL] to complete the
setting.
CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN
This function scans through all CTCSS frequencies to identify the incoming CTCSS frequency on a received signal. You may find this useful when you cannot recall the CTCSS frequency that the other persons in your group are using.
1 Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/SEL].
The current CTCSS frequency appears.
2 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the CTCSS
Freq. ID scan.
“C T” blinks and every CTCSS tone frequency is scanned. When the CTCSS frequency is identified, the transceiver stops scanning and the identified frequency is displayed.
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to resume scanning.
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while the CTCSS tone frequency ID scan is active.
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.
35
8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS
FM DCS OPERA TION
Digital Code Squelch (DCS) is another FM application which allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls. It functions the same way as CTCSS. The only differences are the encode/ decode method and the number of selectable codes. For DCS, you can select from 104 different codes listed in the table below .
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected.
2 Select a band. 3 Select an operating frequency. 4 Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.
“FM” appears.
5 Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch. 6 Press [•/ DCS/SEL] to switch the DCS function
ON (or OFF).
“DCS” appears when the function is ON.
You will hear calls only when the selected code is received. To answer the call, press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone.
Skip steps 7 to 9 if you have already programmed the appropriate DCS code.
Note: You cannot use DCS with the Tone or CTCSS functions.
DCS CODE ID SCAN
This function scans through all DCS codes to identify the incoming DCS code on a received signal. You may find this useful when you cannot recall the DCS code that the other persons in your group are using.
1 Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL].
The current DCS code appears.
2 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the DCS Code
ID scan.
“DCS” blinks and every DCS code is scanned. When the DCS code is identified, the transceiver stops scanning and the identified DCS ID is displayed.
7 Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL].
The current DCS code appears. The default is
023.
8 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the
appropriate DCS code.
The available DCS codes are listed in the following table.
320560231502552133314564216137 520170431212162233324664426237 620270341322362343134305726437 130370541522562643234605136347 230470251622662153544615236457 630411551342172653644325456 340511651442472463254625266 740611261542603563454235466 150221561642113173554645307 350521271152513114264565217 450131471252523214464606327
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to resume scanning.
Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while
the DCS code ID scan is active.
Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.
9 Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL] again to complete
the setting.
36
COMMUNICATING AIDS
RECEIVING
SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY
In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing Mic [UP]/[DWN], there are several other ways to select your frequency. This section describes additional methods of frequency selection that may save you time and effort.
Direct Frequency Entry
When the desired frequency is far removed from the current frequency, directly entering a frequency from the numeric keypad is usually the fastest method.
1 Press [ENT].
“- - - . - - - . - - ” appears.
2 Press the numeric keys ([0] to [9]) to enter
your desired frequency.
Pressing [ENT] fills the remaining digits (the
digits you did not enter) with 0 and completes the entry.
To select 1.85 MHz for example, press [0],
[0], [0], [1], [8], [5], then press [ENT] to complete the input (7 key strokes).
To shorten the key strokes, you can also
use [•] as MHz. Press [1], [•] (MHz), [8], [5], then press [ENT] to complete the input (5 key strokes).
Pressing [CLR] cancels the entry and
restores the current VFO frequency.
Note:
You can enter the frequency in the range of 30.00 kHz to
1299.99999 MHz. Refer to the specifications for the available frequency range.
Attempting to enter a frequency that is outside the selectable frequency range causes an alarm to sound. The entered frequency is rejected.
When the entered frequency does not meet the current VFO frequency step size requirement, the nearest available frequency is automatically selected (Sub­receiver). The nearest available frequency is automatically selected after the entered frequency is changed (Main transceiver).
When the 10 Hz digit (last displayed digit) is entered, the digit 0 is automatically entered for the 1 Hz digit, and frequency entry is completed. The 1 Hz digit is not displayed.
When an entered frequency is accepted, RIT or XIT will be switched OFF, but the RIT or XIT offset frequency is not cleared.
After recalling memory channels 290 to 299 that have Start and End frequencies stored, the receive frequency can be changed by using Direct Frequency Entry within the programmed range.
Using 1 MHz Steps
Pressing [+]/ [–] on the front panel changes Amateur bands. You can also use the MULTI/ CH control to change the operating frequency in steps of 1 MHz.
1 Press [1MHz/ SEL].
“MHz” appears.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control.
Clockwise increases the frequency, counter­clockwise decreases the frequency.
3 Press [1MHz/ SEL] to exit the function.
“MHz” disappears.
If you prefer to change the frequency in steps of 100 kHz or 500 kHz steps rather than 1 MHz, press [FUNC], [1MHz/ SEL] then turn the MULTI/ CH control to select 100 kHz or 500 kHz.
Note: Even if 100 kHz or 500 kHz is selected for the [1MHz/ SEL] key, the MHz icon appears.
Quick QSY
To move up or down the frequency quickly, use the MULTI/ CH control. Turning this control changes the operating frequency in steps of 5 kHz for SSB/ CW/ FSK and 10 kHz for FM/ AM (below 60 MHz).
If you want to change the default frequency step size, press [FUNC], [9/ FINE/STEP]. Select 5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 15 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 30 kHz, 50 kHz or 100 kHz for FM/ AM, and 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 5 kHz, or 10 kHz for the other modes. The default step size is 5 kHz for SSB/ CW/ FSK/ AM and 10 kHz for FM (below 60 MHz).
When changing the operating frequency by using the MULTI/ CH control, frequencies are rounded such that new frequencies are multiples of the frequency step size. To cancel this function, access Menu No. 04 and select OFF (default is ON).
Within the AM broadcast band, the step size automatically defaults to the frequency step value in Menu No. 05. This step size can be switched between 9 kHz (all E-types: ON) and 5 kHz (K-type: OFF) via Menu No. 05.
Note: The programmed frequency step size for the MULTI/ CH control is stored independently for the HF/ 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz and 1.2 GHz bands (Main transceiver). You can also set a different frequency step size for SSB, CW, FSK, AM and FM modes. The sub-receiver also stores the independent frequency step size for 1 18 MHz (K-type only), 144 MHz, 300MHz (K-type only), and 430 (440) MHz bands. You can also set a different frequency step size for FM and AM.
37
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
Fine Tuning
The default step value when turning the Tuning control to change the frequency is 10 Hz for SSB, CW, and FSK modes, and 100 Hz for FM and AM modes. However, you can change the step size to 1 Hz for SSB, CW, and FSK modes, and 10 Hz for FM and AM modes.
1 Press [9/ FINE/STEP].
“FINE” appears.
2 Turn the Tuning control to select the exact
frequency.
3 To quit the function, press [9/ FINE/STEP]
again.
“FINE” disappears.
Note:
Fine Tuning works only on the main transceiver.
If Menu No. 03 is ON, you cannot perform fine tuning in FM mode for all bands and AM mode for the 144 MHz/ 430 (440) MHz/ 1.2 GHz (TS-2000 optional) bands.
Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B)
This function allows you to copy the frequency and modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive VFO.
1 Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or
VFO B.
2 Press [A=B].
The frequency and mode selected in step 1 are copied to the inactive VFO.
3 Press [A/B] to confirm that the frequency was
copied.
RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)
RIT provides the ability to change your receive frequency by ±20.00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without changing your transmit frequency. If the Fine Tuning ([9/ FINE/STEP]) function is ON, the step size becomes 1 Hz. RIT works equally well with all modulation modes and while using VFO or Memory Recall mode.
1 Press [RIT/ CW TUNE].
“RIT” and the RIT offset appear.
3 Turn the RIT/ SUB control to change your receive
frequency.
4 To turn off RIT, press [RIT/ CW TUNE].
The receive frequency is returned to the frequency that was selected prior to step 1.
Note:
RIT works only on the main transceiver.
When storing the frequency in a Memory channel with RIT function ON, RIT offset frequency is added or subtracted to/ from the VFO frequency. Then the calculated data is stored in the Memory channel.
AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)
When using a mode other than FM, AGC selects the time constant for the automatic gain control circuit.
Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver gain and S-meter readings to react slowly to large input changes. A fast time constant causes the receiver gain and the S-meter to react quickly to changes in the input signal. A fast AGC setting is particularly useful in the following situations:
Tuning rapidly
Receiving weak signals
Receiving high-speed CW Unlike other transceivers, the TS-2000’s digital AGC
circuit allows you to adjust the time constant from slow to fast in 20 steps, where 1 is the slowest and 20 is the fastest. Furthermore, you can switch the AGC OFF if you desire.
For your convenience, the following default AGC time constant has already been programmed.
SSB: Level 7 CW: Level 12 FSK: Level 14 AM: Level 5 To change the default time constant: 1 Press [8/ AGC/OFF].
The AGC time constant scale appears on the sub dot-matrix display.
2 To select a slower time constant, turn the
MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise. The bar
indicator moves from F(ast) to S(low). To select a faster time constant, turn the MULTI/ CH control clockwise. The bar indicator moves from S(low) to F(ast).
3 If you want to turn the AGC OFF, press [FUNC],
[8/ AGC/OFF].
2 If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the RIT offset
to 0.
38
Note: You cannot adjust the AGC time constant on the sub-receiver.
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
TRANSMITTING
VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT)
VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching to the transmit mode each time you want to transmit. The transceiver automatically switches to transmit mode when the VOX circuitry senses that you have begun speaking into the microphone.
When using VOX, develop the habit of pausing between thoughts to allow the transceiver to drop back to receive mode briefly. You will then hear if anybody wants to interrupt, plus you will have a short period to gather your thoughts before speaking again. Your listeners will appreciate your consideration as well as respect your more articulate conversation.
VOX can be switched ON and OFF independently for CW and the other modes, excluding FSK.
Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to toggle VOX ON and OFF.
The VOX LED lights.
Microphone Input Level
To enjoy the VOX function, take the time to properly adjust the gain of the VOX circuit. This level controls the capability of the VOX circuit to detect the presence or absence of your voice. In CW mode, this level cannot be adjusted.
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode. 2 Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the VOX
function ON.
The VOX LED lights.
Delay Time
If the transceiver returns to receive mode too quickly after you stop speaking, your final word may not be transmitted. To avoid this, select an appropriate delay time that allows all of your words to be transmitted without an overly long delay after you stop speaking.
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode. 2 Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the VOX
function ON.
3 Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY].
The current setting appears on the sub dot-
matrix display. The default is 50.
4 While speaking into the microphone using your
normal tone of voice, adjust the MULTI/ CH control such that the transceiver switches to receive mode after you have stopped talking.
The selectable range is from 5 to 100
(150 ms to 3000 ms) in steps of 5, or OFF.
5 Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] to set the VOX
delay.
3 Press [FUNC], [VOX/ LEVEL].
The current VOX gain appears on the sub dot-matrix display.
4 While speaking into the microphone using your
normal tone of voice, adjust the setting (default is 4) using the MULTI/ CH control until the transceiver reliably switches to transmit mode each time you speak.
The selectable gain range is from 0 to 9.
The setting should not allow background noise to switch the transceiver to transmit mode.
Note: The VOX gain level can be adjusted even if VOX is switched OFF or while you are transmitting.
39
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS SPEECH PROCESSOR
The Speech Processor levels out large fluctuations in your voice while you speak. When using SSB, FM, or AM mode, this leveling action effectively raises the average transmit output power, resulting in a more understandable signal. The amount of voice compression is fully adjustable. You will notice that using the Speech Processor makes it easier to be heard by distant stations.
Transmit power
Speech Processor OFF
Transmit power
Speech Processor ON
1 Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode. 2 Press [PROC/ LEVEL] to switch the Speech
Processor ON.
The PROC LED lights.
3 Press [FUNC], [PROC/ LEVEL] to enter the
Speech Processor input level adjustment mode.
4 As you speak into the microphone, turn the
MULTI/ CH control so that the compression
meter indicates that the compression level is around 10 dB while you speak.
Using higher compression will not improve your signal clarity or apparent signal strength. Excessively compressed signals are more difficult to understand due to distortion and are less pleasant to hear than signals with less compression.
5 Press [FUNC], [PROC/ LEVEL] to exit the Speech
Processor input level adjustment.
6 Press [MIC/ CAR] to enter the Speech processor
output level Adjustment.
As you speak into the microphone, turn the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects according to your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit. Press [MIC/ CAR] to exit when you finish the adjustment.
Time
Time
XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING)
Similar to RIT, XIT provides the ability to change your transmit frequency by ±20.00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without changing your receive frequency. If the Fine Tuning function is ON, the step size is 1 Hz.
1 Press [XIT/ ALT].
“XIT” and the XIT offset appear.
2 If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the XIT offset
to 0.
3 Turn the RIT/ SUB control to change your transmit
frequency.
4 To turn XIT OFF, press [XIT/ AL T].
The transmit frequency is returned to the frequency that was selected prior to step 1.
Note:
XIT works only on the main transceiver.
The frequency shift set by the RIT/ SUB control is also used by the RIT function. Therefore, changing or clearing the XIT offset also affects the RIT offset.
When the XIT frequency exceeds the limit of available transmission frequency, the transceiver automatically stops transmitting.
40
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS
The quality of your transmitted signal is important, regardless of which on-air activity you pursue. However, it is easy to be casual and overlook this fact since you don’t listen to your own signal. The following sub-sections provide information that will help you tailor your transmitted signal.
TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/AM)
Use Menu No. 22 to select one of the following transmit bandwidths: 2.0 kHz, 2.2 kHz, 2.4 kHz (default), 2.6 kHz, 2.8 kHz, or 3.0 kHz.
htdiwdnaB ycneuqerfdnabssaP
zHk0.2zH0052~005 zHk2.2zH0062~004 zHk4.2zH0072~003 zHk6.2zH0082~002 zHk8.2zH0092~001 zHk0.3zH0003~01
1
If the Speech Processor is ON, the low-cut filter is set to 200 Hz for 2.8 kHz and 3.0 kHz.
1
1
Frequency Response Curves
Amplitude
Conventional
Formant pass
High boost
Off Bass boost
0.7
2.2
Audio frequency (kHz)
TRANSMIT INHIBIT
Transmit Inhibit prevents the transceiver from being placed in transmit mode. No signal can be transmitted and receiver audio is muted when this function is ON even if the PTT or [SEND] is pressed.
TX Inhibit OFF: Transmission is allowed.
TX Inhibit ON: Transmission is not allowed.
Switch the function ON or OFF via Menu No. 54. The default is OFF.
TX Equalizer (SSB/FM/AM)
Use Menu No. 21 to change the transmit frequency characteristics of your signal. You can select from one of six different transmit profiles including the default flat response. Selecting any of the following
items from the Menu causes “ ” to appear on the display .
Off (OFF):
The default frequency response for SSB, FM, and AM.
High boost (H BOOST):
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective for a bassy voice.
Formant pass (F PASS):
Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies outside the normal voice frequency range.
Bass boost (B BOOST):
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective for a voice with more high frequency components.
Conventional (CONVEN):
Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and higher.
User (USER):
CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING
Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually an unwise practice due to the risk of interfering with other stations. However, if necessary, by using the Tuning control you can change the operating frequency while transmitting. You also can change the XIT offset frequency while in transmit mode.
While transmitting, if you select a frequency outside the transmit frequency range, the transceiver is automatically forced to receive mode. If you selected transmit mode by pressing [SEND], transmission will not resume until you select a frequency inside the transmit frequency range, at which time you must press [SEND] again.
Reserved for the optional ARCP software. Off is programmed at the factory as a default.
41
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
esreveR
gniyeK
thgieW
)MPW(deepSgniyeK
52~01 54~62 06~64
FFO5.2:10.3:12.3:1
NO2.3:10.3:18.2:1
CW BREAK-IN
Break-in allows you to transmit CW without manually switching between transmit and receive modes. Two types of Break-ins are available: Semi Break-in and Full Break-in.
Semi Break-in:
When the key contacts open, the transceiver automatically waits for the passage of the time period that you have selected. The transceiver then returns to receive mode.
Full Break-in:
As soon as the key contacts open, the transceiver returns to receive mode.
USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
“CW” appears.
2 Press [VOX/ LEVEL].
The VOX LED lights.
3 Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY].
The current setting (Full or delay time) appears. The default is Full Break-in.
CHANGING KEYING SPEED
The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully adjustable. Selecting the appropriate speed is important in order to send error-free CW that other operators can copy solidly. Selecting a speed that is beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes. You will obtain the best results by selecting a speed that is close to the speed used by the other station.
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
“CW” appears.
2 Press [KEY/ DELAY].
The current keying speed appears. The default is 20 (WPM).
3 While keying the paddle and listening to the
transmit sidetone, turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the appropriate speed.
The speeds range from 10 (WPM) to 60 (WPM), in steps of 1. The larger the number , the faster the speed.
4 Press [KEY/ DELAY] again to complete the
setting.
4 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Full Break-in
or a delay time for Semi Break-in.
Delay time ranges from 5 to 100 (50 ms to 1000 ms) in steps of 5.
5 Begin sending.
The transceiver automatically switches to transmit mode.
When FBK (Full Break-in) is selected: The transceiver immediately switches to receive mode when the key opens.
When a delay time is selected: The transceiver switches to receive mode after the delay time that you have selected has passed.
6 Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] again.
Note: Full Break-in cannot be used with the TL-922/922A linear
amplifier.
ELECTRONIC KEYER
Note: When using the semi-automatic “Bug” function, the selected speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent.
AUTO WEIGHTING
The electronic keyer can automatically change the dot/dash weighting. Weighting is the ratio of dash length to dot length. The weighting changes with your keying speed, thus making your keying easier for other operators to copy.
Use Menu No. 33 to select AUTO, or 2.5 ~ 4.0 (in steps of 0.1) fix weight ratio. The default is AUTO. When the fix weight ratio is selected, the dot/dash weight ratio is locked regardless of the keying speed.
Reverse Keying Weight Ratio
Auto Weighting increases the weighting as you increase your keying speed. However, the electronic keyer also can decrease the weighting as you increase your keying speed.
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 34, and select ON. The default is OFF.
This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that can be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the transceiver’s rear panel. Refer to “Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY)” {page 3} for details regarding this connection. The built-in keyer supports lambic operation.
42
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
BUG KEY FUNCTION
The built-in electronic keyer also can be used as a semi-automatic key. Semi-automatic keys are also known as “Bugs”. When this function is ON, dots are generated in the normal manner by the electronic keyer. Dashes, however, are manually generated by the operator by holding the keyer paddle closed for the appropriate length of time.
To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 35, and select ON. The default is OFF.
Note: When the Bug Key function is ON, CW Message Memory (see below) cannot be used.
CW MESSAGE MEMORY
This transceiver has three memory channels for storing CW messages. Each memory channel can store approximately 50 characters. These memory channels are ideal for storing contest exchanges that you want to send repeatedly. Stored messages can be played back to check message content or for transmitting.
The electronic keyer has a function that allows you to interrupt playback and manually inject your own keying. To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 30, and select ON. The default is OFF.
The electronic keyer can also repeatedly play back the message that you stored. To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 29A and select ON. The default is OFF.
For repetitive message playback, you can change the interval between each series of messages. Use Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the range of 0 to 60 seconds.
Note:
This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function is ON.
Operating the keyer paddle with Menu No. 30 OFF cancels message playback. Even if message playback does not stop because of your keying start timing, you can cancel playback by pressing [CLR].
Storing CW Messages
4 Begin sending using the keyer paddle.
The message you send is stored in memory.
5 To complete the message storage, press [CLR]
to stop.
When the memory becomes full, recording automatically stops.
Note: If you do not operate the keyer paddle after starting to record a message, a pause is stored in the channel.
Checking CW Messages without Transmitting
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
“CW” appears.
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch it
OFF.
3 Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or
[3/ CH3/REC] to select the channel to be
played back.
The message is played back.
To play back the messages stored in the other channels in sequence, press the corresponding channel keys during playback. Up to three channels can be queued at the same time.
While playing back the messages, you can also adjust the keyer speed by pressing [KEY/ DELAY] and turning the MULTI/ CH control.
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
Transmitting CW Messages
Messages can be transmitted using Semi Break­in/ Full Break-in or manual TX/RX switching.
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
“CW” appears.
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL].
The VOX LED turns off.
3 Press [FUNC] and [1/ CH1/REC],
[2/ CH2/ REC], or [3/ CH3/REC] to select a
memory channel to be recorded.
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.
“CW” appears.
2 To use Semi Break-in/ Full Break-in, press
[VOX/ LEVEL]. The VOX LED lights. Otherwise, press [SEND].
3 Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or
[3/ CH3/REC] to select the channel to be
played back.
The message is played back and transmitted automatically.
To transmit the messages stored in the other channels in sequence, press the corresponding channel keys during playback. Up to three channels can be queued at the same time.
43
9 COMMUNICATING AIDS
While playing back the messages, you can also adjust the keyer speed by pressing [KEY/ DELAY] and turning the MULTI/ CH control.
To interrupt transmission, press [CLR].
4 If you pressed [SEND] in step 2, press [SEND]
again to return to receive mode.
Changing the Inter-message Interval Time
For the message playback repeat, select Menu No. 29A and set it ON. You can also change the interval playback time of the message. Use Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the range of 0 to 60 seconds, in steps of 1 second.
Note: Menu 29A and 29B settings are shared with the voice communication modes when the optional DRU-3A is installed.
Changing the Sidetone Volume
Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not change the CW sidetone playback volume. To change the CW sidetone volume, access Menu No. 13 and select OFF, or 1 to 9.
Insert Keying
2 Press [+] to select ON. 3 Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the
Menu mode.
AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you can configure the transceiver to change the operating mode from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW and then transmit in CW mode when you operate the CW keyers.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 36.
2 Press [+] to select ON. 3 Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the
Menu mode.
Note: You must switch the CW break-in function ON to change the mode and transmit in CW mode {page 42}.
If you operate a CW keyer manually while playing back a recorded CW message, the transceiver stops playing back the message. However, during contests or regular QSOs, you may sometimes want to insert a different number or message at a certain point in the recorded message.
In this case, first record the CW message as usual {page 43}, without the number or message you want to insert. Then, access Menu No. 30 and select ON.
Now if you operate a CW keyer while you play back a recorded message, the transceiver pauses the playback of the recorded message, instead of stopping it. When you finish sending the number or message with the keyer, the transceiver resumes playback of the message.
FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW
If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you would sometimes use SSB mode (USB or LSB) just to watch and listen CW signals. It is fine just to monitor those CW signals but you have experienced that changing the mode from SSB to CW results losing the target CW signal. This is because the frequency on the display always shows the true carrier frequency for all modes. If you want the transceiver to shift the receiving frequency to trace the receiving CW signal when changing the mode from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW, switch this function ON. The transceiver shifts the receiving frequency when changing the mode from SSB to CW. So, you can still hear the target signal and instantly transmit the signal in CW, without adjusting the frequency.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 37.
44
SUB-RECEIVER
SUB-RECEIVER
The TS-2000(X) transceiver is equipped with 2 independent receivers. The main transceiver can receive from 30 kHz to the UHF band (or 1.2 GHz band if the optional UT-20 is installed) while the sub­receiver can receive signals in FM or AM mode on the VHF (144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440MHz) band.
You can assign the sub receiver to monitor the local repeater activities or your club channel while you are operating on the HF/ 50MHz or VHF/ UHF/ (Optional
1.2 GHz) bands with the main transceiver. Since the TS-2000 also has a built-in TNC, you can
assign the sub-receiver to monitor the local DX Packet Cluster channel activities without using an external TNC. If a new DX station is reported to the DX Packet Cluster, the transceiver automatically displays the DX station data. If desired, you can further transfer the DX frequency information to the main tranceiver to watch and instantly make contact with the DX station {page 53}.
TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND
In this manual, the frequency on the left of the display is referred to as the MAIN band and the frequency on the right is called the SUB band.
To understand how to control the MAIN band and SUB band frequencies and functions, please note the differences between the TX band and the Control band, below.
RECEIVING
ACTIVATING THE SUB-RECEIVER
Press the SUB AF control to switch the sub-receiver ON or OFF. The orange LED above the SUB AF/ SQL control lights when the sub-receiver is switched ON.
Note: When switching the sub-receiver ON or OFF, you may hear a popping sound from the speaker. This is not a malfunction.
CONTROLLING THE SUB-RECEIVER
To control all the available functions of the sub­receiver, press [SUB] to transfer the controls and transmission capability to the sub-receiver. The “ ” and “ ” icons move from the main transceiver to the sub-receiver. When you press [SEND] or the microphone PTT switch, the transceiver transmits on the SUB band frequency.
Or, if you would like to transmit and receive on the MAIN band while adjusting the sub-receiver functions, simply press [CTRL]. Only the “ ” icon moves from the main transceiver display to the sub display. The “ ” icon remains on the main transceiver display. With this setup, you can continue receiving and transmitting on the main transceiver VFO frequencies while you are making adjustments to the sub-receiver functions.
TX BAND
Press [MAIN] to display the “ ” and “ ” icons on the MAIN band. When “ ” is on the MAIN band display, the MAIN band is currently selected as the transmission band. You can use the MAIN band frequency to transmit signals or to control the main transceiver functions.
If you press [SUB], the “ ” and “ ” icons move to the SUB band display. This means that the SUB band is now selected as the transmission band and controls the functions. You can use the SUB band frequency to transmit signals or control the sub receiver functions.
CONTROL BAND
On some occasions, you may need to adjust the frequency and/ or functions for the band you are not transmitting on. To do this, press [CTRL]. For example, if both “ ” and “ ” are on the MAIN band display, pressing [CTRL] will move “ ” to the SUB band display. “ ” remains on the MAIN band display. This allows you to continue transmitting on the MAIN band while you adjust the functions of the sub-receiver.
If you need to adjust only the frequency of the sub­receiver, you can simply turn the RIT/ SUB control. However, this works only when you are operating the main transceiver without the RIT/ XIT functions. When operating the main transceiver with the RIT/ XIT function, first switch OFF the RIT/ XIT function by pressing [RIT/ CW TUNE] and/or [XIT/ AL T], or press [CTRL] to move the controls to the SUB band. Then turn the MAIN control, the MULTI/ CH control or the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the SUB band frequency.
SELECTING A BAND
Press [SUB] or [CTRL] to assign the function controls to the sub-receiver.
Press [+] or [–] to select the 144 MHz or the 430 (440) MHz band.
45
10 SUB-RECEIVER
elacS yalpsiD etatSnoitcnuF
ShtgnertslangisdevieceRevieceR
RWPrewoptuptuotimsnarTtimsnarT
S
Holding down the key changes the bands continuously.
If “MHz” is visible on the display, first press [1MHz] to exit from the 1MHz Step Up/ Down mode.
ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN
Turn the SUB AF control clockwise to increase the audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the level.
AF
SQL
SUB
TO B B
EL
1MHz
HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000
SUB
MENU
CALL
TF­SET
MAIN SUB
SG.SEL
M
SCAN
CTRL
M
Q
R
C.IN
M
S
/
M
B
/
A
H
/C
O
F
V
/M
O
F
V
L
E
.S
G
O
F
V
9.6k STA
CON
CW TUNE
RIT
RIT/SUB ALT XIT
_
+
CLEAR P.C.T SET
H
C
I
IN
T
L
A
U
M
M
C
B
L
A
U
N
A
N
I
M
A
G
F
R
O
M
E
M
K
IC
U
N
I
.
M
L
T
A
S
V
E
R
IN
IT
B
A
L
P
U
M
S
S
E
C
A
R
T
F
A
B
=
A
L
Q
S
N
I
.
M
The “ ” and “ ” icons are both on the sub­receiver display:
You can do all the above, plus transmit on the SUB band frequency.
This transceiver provides many other methods for selecting a frequency quickly. For further details, refer to “SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY” {page 37}.
SUB-RECEIVER PANEL METER
The multifunction meter measures the parameters described in the table below. The S-meter appears when in receive mode and the PWR meter appears when in transmit mode. Peak readings for the S- meter and PWR functions are held momentarily.
Note: Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.
SELECTING A MODE FOR THE SUB-RECEIVER
Note: The position of the SUB AF control does not affect the volume of beeps caused by pressing buttons. The audio level for Packet operation is also independent of the SUB AF control setting.
ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH
Turn the SUB SQL control clockwise when no signals are present, to select the squelch level at which background noise is just eliminated. The SUB band LED turns off when the squelch is ON.
SELECTING A FREQUENCY
When you operate both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver at the same time, you will be in one of the following conditions. First, check where the “ ” and “ ” icons are on the display, then follow the instructions below.
The “ ” and “ ” icons are both on the MAIN band display:
Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the sub­receiver frequency.
” is on the SUB band display and “ ” is on the MAIN band display:
Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the sub­receiver frequency.
” is on the MAIN band display and “ ” is on the SUB band display:
Turn the RIT/ SUB control, the MULTI/ CH control, or the MAIN control to adjust the frequency. Or, directly enter the frequency using the numeric keypad {page 37}. However, the input frequency must be within the sub-receiver frequency range. The frequency you selected may round up to the nearest workable frequency step size {page 37}. You cannot transmit on the sub-band frequency.
First, confirm that the “ ” icon is on the SUB band display. If it is not, press [SUB] or [CTRL] to assign the function controls to the SUB band.
The SUB band can only be used to transmit in FM mode and receive in FM or AM mode. Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the operating mode for the sub­receiver. The narrow bandwidth operation for AM is not available for the SUB band frequency. Refer to “Narrow Bandwidth for FM” {page 29} for FM operation.
FM CTCSS OPERATION
You can assign an independent CTCSS tone to the sub-receiver. Refer to FM CTCSS OPERATION {page 35} for function and control details.
FM DCS OPERATION
You can assign an independent DCS code to the sub­receiver. Refer to FM DCS OPERATION {page 36} for function and control details.
TONE FREQ. ID SCAN
This function scans through all the tone frequencies in order to identify the incoming tone frequency on the receiving signal of the sub-receiver. Refer to TONE FREQ. ID SCAN {page 34} for function and control details.
DCS CODE ID SCAN
This function scans through all the DCS codes in order to identify the incoming DCS code on the receiving signal of sub-receiver. Refer to DCS CODE ID SCAN {page 36} for function and control details.
46
10 SUB-RECEIVER
ATTENUATOR
The attenuator reduces the level of received signals. It is useful when there is strong interference from an adjacent frequency. Since the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same antenna for the 144 MHz and 430 (440) MHz bands, activating the attenuator function for the sub-receiver also causes the function to switch ON for the same band of the main transceiver.
PRE-AMPLIFIER
The pre-amplifier amplifies the level of received signals. It is useful when the receiving signal is weak. If there is no strong interference from adjacent frequencies, switch the pre-amplifier ON to raise the receiving signal level. Since the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same antenna for the 144 MHz and 430 (440) MHz bands, activating the pre-amplifier function for the sub-receiver also causes the function to switch ON for the same band of the main transceiver.
DUAL WATCH
TRANSMITTING
First, confirm that the “ ” icon is on the SUB band display. Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone in your normal tone of voice. When you finish speaking, press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].
SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER
You can also adjust the output power for FM mode in the 144 and 430 (440) MHz bands when you are operating the sub-receiver.
1 Press [PWR].
The current transmit power appears.
If different frequency bands are set on the main transceiver and sub-receiver, you can still monitor the other band activities while transmitting on the TX band. It is useful that you can still monitor the local repeater frequency (VHF or UHF band) while you are working on a DX station on the HF band of the main transceiver.
If you have the same frequency band (VHF or UHF band) for the main transceiver and sub-receiver, you can monitor both frequencies independently at the same time. However, both receivers will temporarily mute when you transmit because the transceiver shares the same 144 MHz and 430 (440) MHz band antenna between the main transceiver and sub­receiver.
SCAN
All types of scanning are also available for the sub­receiver. However, the operating frequency range is limited to the sub-receiver’s frequency coverage. Refer to “SCAN” {page 66} for details on how to operate the scan function.
NOISE REDUCTION
Since the sub-receiver can receive only in FM or AM mode, DSP noise reduction 1 (Line Enhanced) is available to reduce the noise from the receiving signals. Refer to “REJECTING INTERFERENCE” {page 56} for details on how to control and adjust the function.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise to
reduce the power or clockwise to increase the power.
Note:
The selectable range varies depending on the band and mode {page 79}.
Output power configuration is also reflected in the main transceiver.
MICROPHONE GAIN
Access Menu No. 41 and select “LOW”, “MID”, or “HIGH” for the microphone gain.
Note: When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode, select “HIGH” microphone gain. Microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode; this may cause insufficient modulation. For other microphones, select “MID” or “LOW”.
FM REPEATER OPERATION
You can also configure an independent repeater offset frequency for the sub-receiver, if necessary. Refer to “FM REPEATER OPERATION” {page 32} for details.
REVERSE FUNCTION
Press [TF-SET] to switch the sub-receiver Reverse function ON (or OFF). “R” appears while the Reverse function is active on the sub-receiver. Refer to “REVERSE FUNCTION” {page 34} for details.
47
10 SUB-RECEIVER AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)
You can also use ASC functions on the 144 MHz and 430 (440) MHz bands of the sub-receiver. While using a repeater, ASC periodically monitors the strength of the uplink frequency to check the signals. Press and hold [TF-SET] until “[R]” appears on the SUB band display. Refer to “AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK” {page 34} for function and control details.
TRANSMITTING A TONE
You can assign another Tone to the sub-receiver. Refer to “TRANSMITTING A TONE” {page 33} for function and control details.
MEMORY
You can also utilize all the memory functions {page 58}, including the Quick Memory function {page 64}, while you are operating the sub-receiver. However, the operating frequency range is limited to the sub­receiver’s frequency coverage. You cannot recall any memory channels that are outside the sub-receiver’s frequency coverage. These channels are automatically skipped when they are recalled on the sub-receiver.
48
SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
PACKET RADIO
Packet is a unit of data transmitted as a whole from one computer to another, on a network. Packets can be transmitted on radio waves as well as on communications lines. Besides a transceiver and a computer, all you need is a terminal node controller (TNC) or Multimode Communications Processor (MCP). One of the tasks of TNCs and MCPs is to convert data packets to audio tones, and vice versa. This transceiver has a built-in TNC which allows you to use basic (not full) packet applications.
A variety of packet applications developed by hams include packet bulletin board systems (PBBSs). PBBSs are created and maintained by volunteers called System Operators (SysOp). You may access one of your local PBBSs to send e-mail, download files, or obtain various useful information. Thousands of PBBSs, which have formed a worldwide network, relay e-mail to their intended destinations around the world.
PBBS
When you access a local PBBS for the first time, you often need to register as a new user. After you are successfully registered, it will then be available as your home PBBS. E-mail addressed to you will be held under a directory, called a mailbox, on your home PBBS.
To send e-mail, you must designate the address of a recipient, using his or her call sign and the call sign of his or her home PBBS; ex. KD6NUH@KJ6HC. In this example, the e-mail is addressed to KD6NUH whose home PBBS is KJ6HC. If your home PBBS cannot find KJ6HC in its address file to forward your mail, you must designate the address in more detail. You may enter “KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA”, or “KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA.USA”, or up to “KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA.USA.NA”, as necessary. The complete address of a recipient living in the U.S.A., for example, should include an appropriate region code (preceded by a #), state, country, and continent abbreviations, as above.
For further information, consult reference books which should be available at any store that handles Amateur Radio equipment. Web pages relating to Packet will also be helpful. On Internet search engines, use “Packet Radio” as key words to find those Web pages.
Note:
Unlike a TNC, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) serves as a communications interface in several digital modes such as Packet, RTTY, and AMTOR. You can cause it to switch among the modes by sending a single command from your computer.
If there is an amateur radio club in your area, consider becoming a member. You can often learn more in an hour from experienced hobbyists, than in a month of independent research. Ask on the local repeaters, or contact your national amateur radio organization (the ARRL in the U.S.A.) for information on local amateur radio clubs. You’ll be glad you did.
BUILT-IN TNC
This transceiver has a built-in TNC which conforms to the AX.25 protocol. Since the built-in TNC has been designed to work with the Packet Cluster Tune {page 53} and Sky Commander II+ {page 83} functions, some of the enhanced TNC commands may not be available. For the commands supported by the built-in TNC, consult “BUILT-IN TNC COMMAND LIST” starting on page 110. The AX-25 protocol is used for communication between TNCs. The TNC accepts data from your personal computer and assembles it into packets. It then converts those packets to audio tones which the transceiver can transmit. The TNC also takes audio tones from the transceiver, converts them to data for the computer, and checks for errors in the data.
In order to activate the built-in TNC, access Menu No. 55 and select ON. The default is OFF. “PKT” will appear to show that the built-in TNC is ON.
The TNC mainly functions in Command or Converse mode. First, you should learn the difference between these two modes.
Command mode
When you select Packet mode, the TNC enters Command mode. A “cmd:” prompt appears on the computer screen. You can type commands from the computer keyboard to change the settings of the TNC. When in Converse mode, press [Ctrl]+[C] on the keyboard to return to Command mode.
Converse mode
The TNC enters this mode when a link with the target station is established. On the computer keyboard, type an appropriate command and a message if necessary, then press [Enter] or [Return]. What you type is converted into packets and transmitted over the air. When in Command mode, type CONVERSE, CONV, or K to enter Converse mode.
Note: The built-in TNC automatically reinitiates when a malfunction is detected; this does not designate that the transceiver is defective.
49
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
adanaC/.A.S.U )acirfA/eporuE(1noigeRURA
0381~0081— 5363~02630063~0953 0017~0807—
05101~04101—
5.99041~5904121141~10141,99041~98041 01181~50181— 00112~0901202112~00112 98182~0218200392~00292,05182~02182 08705~00605—
090541~019441— 570144~579044520134~050034
PREPARATION
1 Connect the transceiver to your personal
computer (via an external TNC or MCP if desired).
See “COMPUTER” {page 93} and “MCP AND TNC” {page 95}.
2 Install an appropriate terminal program onto the
personal computer.
A variety of freeware and shareware programs can be obtained in various ways. Consult your reference material or other “packeteers”.
3 Initiate the terminal program and set the following
parameters on the personal computer:
Transfer rate (TNC/MCP <–> Computer): 9600 bps (default setting)
Data length: 8 bit
Stop bit: 1 bit
Parity: Non-parity
Flow control: Hardware
4 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B. 5 Access Menu No. 46 and select the main band or
the sub-band (default) as the data band.
“TNC” appears on the data band.
If you are using an external TNC or MCP, access Menu No. 50E to make this selection. The default is main band.
If you are using an external TNC or MCP, proceed with the subsequent steps.
11 Following the instructions provided with your TNC
or MCP, enter the calibration mode so that you can generate a mark condition.
The MAIN band LED changes from green (RX) to red (TX).
12 Access Menu No. 50B to select the appropriate AF
input level.
Select a proper input level, so that the ALC meter reflects within the ALC zone.
13 Exit the calibration mode.
The MAIN band LED changes from red (TX) to green (RX).
14 Access Menu No. 50C to select the appropriate
AF output level.
You cannot use the AF control to make this adjustment.
If you have selected sub-band in step 5, access Menu No. 50D instead.
The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used for Packet are listed below:
6 Access Menu No. 47 and select 1200 bps (default)
or 9600 bps as the transfer rate between TNCs.
You must select the same transfer rate as the target station.
If you are using an external TNC or MCP, access Menu No. 50F to make this selection. The default is 1200 bps.
7 Select an operating frequency. 8 Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [FM/ AM/ NAR] to
select LSB, USB, or FM mode.
9 Access Menu No. 50A and select ON to activate
the DSP packet filter for the main transceiver.
10 Turn the HI/ SHIFT control to select the center
frequency of the packet mode. You can further select either “NAR” (narrow) or “WID” (wide) for the receiver filter width by turning the LO/ WIDTH control.
Note:
The packet (9600 bps) operation is not affected by the DSP packet filter settings.
The DSP packet filter works only on the main transceiver.
ycneuqerFretneC edoMgnitarepO
zH000113KSP zH0071)spb0021KSFA(tekcaP zH0122)spb003KSFA(tekcaP
KSPKSP
DCD SENSE
You can also select the method for inhibiting the built­in TNC from transmitting. Access Menu No. 48 and select one of the two methods. The default is “TNC BAND”.
TNC BAND: The TNC does not transmit when signals are present
on the TNC (data) band. MAIN&SUB: The TNC does not transmit when signals are present
on the main transceiver or sub-receiver.
50
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
adanaC/.A.S.U
1noigeRURA
)acirfA/eporuE(
0481~00812481~8381
)0953:XD(5463~50630263~0853 )0407:XD(0017~08075407~5307
05101~0410105101~04101
5.99041~070415.99041~08041 01181~0018190181~10181 00112~0701202112~08012 03942~0294292942~02922 05182~0708205182~05082
RADIO TELETYPEWRITING (RTTY)
RTTY is the data communications mode with the longest history. It was originally designed for use with mechanical teletypewriters which were often used before personal computers became common. Now you can easily start operating RTTY with a personal computer and MCP. Unlike Packet, each time you type a letter, it is transmitted over the air. What you typed is transmitted and displayed on the computer screen of the recipient.
RTTY operation uses frequency shift keying (FSK) and the 5-bit Baudot code or the 7-bit ASCII code to transmit information.
For the cable connections, see “RTTY” {page 95}. For further information, consult reference books
about Amateur Radio. 1 Access Menu No. 38 and select an FSK shift.
FSK shift is the difference in frequencies between a mark and a space.
The 170 Hz default is used on the Amateur bands.
2 Access Menu No. 39 and select a key-down
polarity.
Select “NORMAL” to transmit a mark when keying down or “INVERS” to transmit a space. The default is “NORMAL”.
3 Access Menu No. 40 and select high tone
(2125 Hz) or low tone (1275 Hz) for mark.
High tone (default) is commonly used nowadays.
4 Select an operating frequency.
7 Following the instructions provided with your MCP,
enter a command from your computer to select transmit mode.
The MAIN band LED changes from green (RX) to red (TX).
You may instead press [SEND] to manually select the transmit mode.
8 Begin sending data from your computer.
Use Menu No. 50C to select the appropriate AF output level. The AF control cannot be used for this adjustment.
Press [FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI] to monitor your signals. Press [FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI] again to quit this function.
9 When finished transmitting, enter a command from
your computer to return to receive mode.
The MAIN band LED changes from red (TX) to green (RX).
If you pressed [SEND] in step 7, press [SEND] again.
The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used for RTTY operation are listed below:
5 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select FSK.
“FSK” appears.
6 If necessary to be compatible with the other
station, press [FUNC], [CW/ FSK/ REV] to reverse the transceiver to the upper sideband.
“FSR” appears.
Traditionally, the lower sideband is used for
Press [FUNC], [CW/ FSK/ REV] to return to
FSK operation.
the lower sideband.
Note: Y ou may adjust the carrier level when necessary. Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment mode. With a key down
condition, turn the MUL TI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reads in the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit.
51
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
adanaC/.A.S.U
1noigeRURA
)acirfA/eporuE(
7583,54830473~0373
17175407~5307
33241,0324153241~52241 0431254312~53312 0868258682~57682
005541—
AMTOR/ PacTOR/ CLOVER/ G-TOR/ PSK31
Besides Packet and RTTY, digital modes which have been used among hams include AMTOR, PacTOR, CLOVER, G-TOR, and PSK31. This manual does not describe much about these modes. For details, consult reference books about Amateur Radio.
AMTOR (AMateur Teleprinting Over Radio) has brought amateur HF digital communication into the computer age. It is the first error-free HF digital mode by which data bursts (not steady stream of data) are transmitted.
PacTOR (Packet Teleprinting On Radio) has combined the best features of both AMTOR and Packet to improve the efficiency of HF digital communications. Like Packet and AMTOR, PacTOR sends error-free data using a handshaking method.
Of all the Amateur Radio HF digital modes, CLOVER offers the best overall performance using a complicated modulation technique, automatic power adjustment and other advanced features. It may allow communications to be maintained under the worst conditions.
G-TOR (Golay-coded Teleprinting Over Radio) is a relatively new Amateur Radio digital mode currently in use. G-TOR was developed specifically to handle the adverse conditions of communicating, across the solar system, with spacecraft during their missions.
SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE
Slow-scan Television (SSTV) is a popular application for transmitting still images over the air, from one station to another. Instead of trying to describe your station, simply showing it is much faster. Transmitting images over the air requires a scan converter, besides a transceiver. A scan converter transforms images taken with a video camera into audio signals that can be fed into your transceiver. The recipient’s scan converter transforms audio signals back into video images so that he or she can view them on a TV set.
Nowadays instead of a scan converter, many hams use a personal computer, a software application, and an interface attached to the transceiver. This is much cheaper, more flexible, and does not require a TV set. In recent years, many low cost digital cameras have become available. You can transfer images from these cameras into your computer.
For further information, consult reference books about Amateur Radio. The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used for SSTV operation are listed below:
PSK31 was developed by an RTTY enthusiast, G3PLX, in the Great Britain. The operating technique is very similar to the conventional Baudot-RTTY, although more sensitive fine-tuning is required, as a PSK31 signal requires a tuning accuracy of a few Hertz. A special feature of PSK31 is that it allows the entire ASCII character set, including the back space character.
Your MCP should handle some or all of the above modes. For available modes on your MCP, consult the instruction manual for the MCP. For the cable connections, see “MCP AND TNC” {page 95}.
On most HF bands, audio frequency shift keying (AFSK) is used for the above modes. This method of modulation uses audio tones therefore either LSB or USB mode should be selected. Traditionally, LSB is used, similar to RTTY, with the exception of AMTOR which is normally operated in USB.
AMTOR activity can be found on or near 14075 and
3637.5 kHz. These are also good starting places when searching for PacTOR, Clover, G-TOR, or PSK31 stations.
Note: When using SSB mode for digital operation, use a fast AGC setting and switch your Speech Processor OFF.
Fax (facsimile) is one of the original image transmission modes. Using this mode allows you to exchange more detailed graphics than SSTV. Amateur Radio fax functions much like old analog fax systems. It scans paper and converts acquired image data into a series of tones representing white and black portions of the image. Because fax requires longer transmission time, you should use it only when band conditions are stable with strong signals.
Popular fax frequencies include the following:
7245, 14245, 21345 (International Net), and 28945 kHz
Operating on SSTV or fax mainly involves learning the functionality of your computer application or accessory hardware that supports these modes. Consult the instruction manual that comes with your software or accessory equipment.
52
Note: When operating either SSTV or fax, use a fast AGC setting and switch OFF your Speech Processor, for best results.
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
KNILPU
NWOD
KNIL
dnaB
~FH
zHM05
zHM441
/034
zHM044
zHG2.1
~FH
zHM05
√√√
zHM441
√√
/034
zHM044
√√
zHG2.1
√√√
DX PACKET CLUSTER TUNE
DX Packet Cluster is a packet network which consist of nodes and stations who are interested in DXing and contesting. If one station finds a DX station on the air, he or she sends a notice to his or her node. This node then passes the information to all its local stations as well as another node. This transceiver can display received DX information and hold the latest information on up to 10 DX stations.
Node
This transceiver is also capable of automatically tuning in a reported DX station. In order to use the Auto Tune function, access Menu No. 49A and select AUTO; the default is MANUAL.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B. 2 Press [SUB] to activate the sub-receiver. 3 The SUB LED lights. 4 Tune to the frequency of the target DX Packet
Cluster node on the sub-receiver.
5 Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] to enter the Packet
Clusters Monitor mode.
Each time new DX Packet Cluster data is received, an alarm sounds and the information is displayed on the sub-receiver as shown below:
Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] again to exit this mode.
6 If you are using the Auto Tune function, press
[SET/ P.C.T.].
The main band is tuned to the frequency of the reported DX station, on the sub-receiver.
Transmitting on the tuned frequency deactivates the Auto Tune. Press [SET/ P.C.T.] again to reactivate it, if necessary.
To access desired DX information from memory, press QUICK MEMO [MR], then turn the MULTI/ CH control. Press [SET/ P.C.T.] to tune the main band to the selected station. Press QUICK MEMO [MR] again to quit the DX information display.
The transceiver can be set to output a Morse code instead of a beep when new DX Packet Cluster data is received. Access Menu No. 49B and select MORSE. VOICE or OFF can also be set.
Note:
You cannot send DX information to a node using this function.
The DX information in memory is cleared when the transceiver power is turned OFF.
Node
Node
Station
SATELLITE OPERATION
Amateur satellites receive on one band and transmit on another. This transceiver can handle uplink/ downlink frequency combinations simultaneously as shown below.
Some satellites require a rotator that allows azimuth and elevation control, plus a high-gain directional antenna. The antenna must track the satellite which travels from horizon to horizon. Even so, many hams have been successfully using fixed omnidirectional antennas. If you are using a directional antenna, it would be wise to obtain a pass prediction program.
Doppler Shift is another aspect that you must take into account when working the satellites. As a target satellite travels away, frequencies on which you will receive change. This transceiver has a function that automatically keeps the sum or difference between the two frequencies identical when you change the receive frequency.
For further information, consult Internet Web pages relating to Amateur satellites. On Internet search engines, use “AMSAT” as key words to find those Web pages. Or, you can directly go to the AMSAT (the Radio Amateur Satellite Corporation) homepage at http://www.amsat.org. From AMSAT Web pages, you can download a variety of utilities, including pass prediction programs, which will ease your satellite operations.
BASIC OPERA TION
When you enter the Satellite mode, you are always controlling one of 10 Satellite Memory channels with the adjustable frequency function. The Satellite Memory channel number (0 ~ 9) appears on the main transceiver’s display when you enter the mode.
1 Press [SATL] to enter Satellite mode.
The default downlink (435.9 MHz) and uplink (145.9 MHz) frequencies appear.
“TRACE”, “R”, and “SATL” appear to indicate the current selections.
2 On VFO A, tune to the downlink (RX) frequency of
the satellite.
53
11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS
3 Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [CW/ FSK/ REV] to
select LSB, USB, or CW mode.
4 As the Satellite moves, fine tune to the changing
downlink (RX) frequency of the satellite using the Tuning control (adjusting the Doppler effect).
As you adjust the downlink (RX) frequency, the Trace function automatically changes the uplink frequency so that the sum of the two frequencies is kept the same (Reverse Trace).
If necessary, press [A=B / TRACE] to quit the Trace function. “TRACE” disappears.
The trace function can also change the uplink (TX) frequency so that the difference between the two frequencies is kept the same (Normal Trace).
5 If you want to switch to the normal trace mode,
press [SPLIT / REV]. “R” disappears.
6 To adjust the frequency on the sub-band display
(normally the uplink frequency) without tracing, turn the RIT/ SUB control. To adjust it using the trace function, press [A/B / M/S] to swap the main band frequency and sub-band frequency then turn the Tuning control or MULTI/ CH control. The following table shows which control to use when adjusting frequencies with tracing ON and OFF.
ECARTECART
NIAMNIAM
NIAMNIAM lortnoc
NIAM
ECARTECART /
ECART
RECARTRECART
RECARTRECART NO
RECART
)eniF(
HC/ITLUMHC/ITLUM
HC/ITLUMHC/ITLUM
HC/ITLUM
)esraoC(lortnoc
BUS/TIRBUS/TIR
BUS/TIRBUS/TIR
BUS/TIR
lortnoc
buSdnaniaMniaM buSdnaniaMniaM
buSbuS
ECARTECART
ECARTECART /
ECART
RECARTRECART
RECARTRECART FFO
RECART
SATELLITE CHANNEL NAME
You can name each Satellite Memory channel using a maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters. First, store the settings to the Satellite Memory channel {above}. To store the Satellite Channel name:
1 Press [M.IN] then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
select the Satellite Memory channel.
2 Press [DISP]. 3 An entry cursor appears. Select a character by
turning MULTI/ CH control, then move the cursor using [SUB] or [MAIN]. You can also use the other methods to enter the characters. Refer to page 63 for details.
4 Press [M.IN] to store the name to the Satellite
Memory channel. Press [CLR] to quit.
5 The stored Satellite Memory name appears on the
main dot-matrix display.
QUICK MEMORY IN SATELLITE MODE
While in the Satellite mode, only 1 Quick Memory channel is available. It uses Satellite Memory channel 9 to store the settings. To store the settings to the Quick Memory in Satellite mode, press QUICK MEMO [M.IN]. The settings are stored to Satellite Memory channel 9.
To recall the Quick Memory, press QUICK MEMO
[MR] or select Satellite Memory channel 9, using the MULTI/ CH control. Satellite Memory channel 9 is
recalled.
CHECKING THE UPLINK FREQUENCY
STORING SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNELS
You can store all the above settings to one of 10 Satellite memory channels for the future operations.
1 Press [M.IN], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
select a channel from 0 to 9.
2 Select your desired settings. 3 Press [M.IN] again to store the selection to the
memory channel. To quit, press [CLR].
Note: The Satellite Memory channel does not hold the frequency
adjustment values when the channel is changed. So, when you change the channel number or switch the transceiver OFF, the adjustment frequency values are cleared if they are not stored by pressing [M.IN].
RECALLING A SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNEL
1 Press [VFO/M / VFO/CH].
The MULTI/ CH LED lights.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired
Satellite Memory channel.
3 Press [VFO/M / VFO/CH] to return to the
frequency adjustment mode.
When you need to monitor the uplink (TX) frequency, press [TF-SET]. Each time you press [TF-SET], the uplink (TX) frequency and the downlink (RX) frequency are swapped.
USING XIT/ RIT IN SATELLITE MODE
You can also use the RIT or XIT function while in the Satellite mode. Press [RIT/ CW TUNE] or [XIT/ AL T] to activate the function. When the RIT or XIT function is ON, the sub-band frequency display shows the current RIT or XIT offset frequency instead of the operating frequency. To clear the RIT or XIT offset frequency, press [CLEAR].
Note: You cannot activate both the RIT and XIT functions at the same time in the Satellite mode.
CHANGING THE FREQUENCY BAND
If you need to change the uplink and/or downlink frequency band, press [CTRL] to move the “ ” icon to the frequency band that you want to change. Then, press [+] or [–] to select the band you want to operate.
54
REJECTING INTERFERENCE
edoM
tuc-woltluafeD
)zH(yceuqerf
tuc-hgihtluafeD
)zH(ycneuqerf
MF/BSS0030062
MA0010005
DSP FILTERS
KENWOOD digital signal processing (DSP) technology is used for the functions described in this section. Using DSP filtering, the TS-2000 frees you from installing many analog filters for each operating mode. Additionally, you can control the bandwidth, cancel the multiple jamming beat, and reduce the noise level using DSP filtering technology.
CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER BANDWIDTH
For improving interference reduction capability, this transceiver also provides IF filters designed using DSP technology. When in SSB, FM, or AM mode, you can change the filter bandwidth by altering its low and/or high cut-off frequency. For CW and FSK modes, you can change the filter bandwidth by directly specifying a bandwidth. Changing the filter bandwidth does not affect the current receive frequency.
Note:
The receive filter bandwidth can be changed only on the main transceiver.
The IF DSP filter is not available in FM mode.
SSB/ FM/ AM Modes
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM mode. 2 Press [DISP/ SEL].
The current filter selection appears.
3 Turn the LO/ WIDTH control clockwise to raise
the low cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise to lower the low cut-off frequency.
4 To return the display to the current operating
mode, press [DISP/ SEL].
Note:
The cut-off frequencies can be adjusted independently for each operating mode. When you change the operating mode, the previous setting is recalled for each operating mode.
When the Packet filter (Menu No. 50A) is ON, you cannot change the DSP filter bandwidth. Switch the Packet filter OFF to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth.
CW/ FSK Modes
1 Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW or FSK
mode.
2 Press [DISP/ SEL].
The current filter selection appears.
3 Turn the LO/ WIDTH control clockwise to
increase (wide) the bandwidth, or counterclockwise to decrease (narrow) the bandwidth.
LO/ WIDTH
f
f
Turn the HI/ SHIFT control clockwise to raise the high cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise to lower the high cut-off frequency.
HI/ SHIFT
f
f
tsujdA )zH(snoitceleSycneuqerF
HTDIW/OL
,009,008,007,006,005
0001
Interfering
edoM )zH(snoitceleShtdiwdnaB
WC
signal
Desired
signal
Interfering
0002,0001,006,005
signal
tluafeD
)zH(
,004,003,002,051,001,08,05
006
KSF0051,0001,005,0520051
4 As for CW, you can further adjust the shift
frequency for passband. Turn the HI/ SHIFT control to adjust the shift frequency from 400 to 1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz. The default shift frequency is 800 Hz.
5 To return the display to the current operating
mode, press [DISP/ SEL].
,004,003,002,001,05,0
TFIHS/IH
,0002,0081,0061,0041 ,0082,0062,0042,0022
0005,0004,0043,0003
55
12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE NOTCH FILTER (SSB)
Auto Notch filter automatically locates and attenuates any single interfering tone within the receive pass band. This function operates digitally at the IF filter level, hence it can affect your S-meter reading and may also affect (slightly attenuate) your desired signal. However, controlling the AGC level by notching out the strong interfering beat signals could bring up the desired SSB signal that is covered by the interfering beat signal. If the interfering tone is weak, you may find that Beat Cancel eliminates them more effectively.
Interfering tones
Receive pass band
Before
Desired signal
After
Press [A.N./ LEVEL] to toggle the Auto Notch Filter ON and OFF.
“A.N.” appears when the function is ON.
The interfering beat signals are notched out.
If the interfering beat signals change the tone frequency randomly, you can adjust the Auto Notch level.
Press [FUNC], [A.N./ LEVEL] to access the Auto Notch level adjustment, then turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the level from FIX, and 1 to 4. Level 1 is the slowest beat tone tracking speed and Level 4 is the fastest. FIX terminates the beat tone tracking. Adjust this pamameter manually to remove the beat signal if necessary.
AUTO BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ AM)
Auto Beat Cancel uses an adaptive filter and attenuates more than one cyclic interference within the receive pass band. The adaptive filter changes its characteristics according to the nature of the signal being received at any given moment. You can use automatic Beat Cancel when in SSB or AM mode.
Interfering tones
Press [B.C./ MANUAL] to toggle the Auto Beat Cancel ON and OFF.
“B. C.” appears when the function is ON.
If desired, you can manually control the beat
cancel frequency.
Receive pass band
Before
Desired signal
After
MANUAL BEAT CANCEL (CW/ SSB/ AM)
Press [FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL], then turn the MANUAL BC control to select the single Beat Cancel
frequency manually. You can select the beat cancel frequency from approx. 300Hz to 3000 Hz by turning the control. Turn the control clockwise to select a higher frequency and counterclockwise to select a lower frequency.
Since the DSP Beat Cancel processes the incoming signals at the AF stage, strong beat signals may control the AGC, then weaken the target signal level. In this case, use the Auto Notch Filter instead, to remove the beat signal from the IF passband filter.
Note: While adjusting the MANUAL BC control, the transceiver clicks. This is not a malfunction.
NOISE REDUCTION (N.R.1: ALL MODES, N.R.2: SSB/ CW/ FSK/ AM)
This transceiver provides two types of Noise Reduction functions (1 and 2) for reducing random noise which interferes with the desired signal. Trying them both is the easiest way to judge which function works more effectively under the current conditions. Normally, select Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced) in SSB mode and Noise Reduction 2 (SP AC) in CW mode.
Press [N.R./ LEVEL] to toggle between Noise Reduction 1, Noise Reduction 2, and OFF.
“N. R. 1” or “N.R. 2” appears, depending on which function is selected.
Setting the N.R. 1 Level Adjustment
The Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced Method) uses an adaptive filter to reduce the noise element from the received signals. When the S/N ratio is reasonably good in SSB, using N.R.1 will improve the S/N further.
While N.R. 1 is ON, you can further adjust the noise reduction level by pressing [FUNC], [N.R./ LEVEL], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the level from 1 to 10 or AUT O. The default is AUTO.
Setting the N.R. 2 Time Constant
You can change the correlation time for Noise Reduction 2 (SPAC). When in SSB mode, select the correlation time that allows you to hear signals with more clarity. When receiving CW, it is best to select the longest correlation time that allows reliable reception. The longer the correlation time, the better the S/N ratio.
When Noise Reduction 2 is ON, press [FUNC], [N.R./ LEVEL], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the correlation time from 2 ms to 20 ms. The default is 20 ms.
Note:
Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the clarity of signals or induce pulse noise, depending on the conditions.
Only N.R. 1 is available for the sub-receiver. However , the level cannot be adjusted.
56
12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE
sdnaBycneuqerF
)zHM(
reifilpma-erP
)tluafeD(
rotaunettA
)tluafeD(
5.2~30.0FFOFFO
1.4~5.2FFOFFO
5.7~1.4FFOFFO
5.01~5.7NOFFO
5.41~5.01NOFFO
5.81~5.41NOFFO
5.12~5.81NOFFO
5.52~5.12NOFFO
0.03~5.52NOFFO
0.06~0.03NOFFO 003~811NOFFO 215~003NOFFO
0031~0421NOsyawlAFFOsyawlA
NOISE BLANKER
Noise Blanker was designed to reduce pulse noise such as that generated by automobile ignitions. Noise Blanker does not function in FM mode.
Press [NB/ LEVEL] to toggle the Noise Blanker ON and OFF.
“NB” appears when the function is ON.
You can further adjust the Noise blanker level from 1 to 10. The default level is 6.
Press [FUNC], [NB/ LEVEL], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to adjust the noise blanker level.
“NB LEVEL” and the current level appear on the sub dot-matrix display.
Note: Noise Blanker is available only for the main transceiver in SSB, CW, FSK, and AM modes.
ATTENUATOR
The Attenuator reduces the level of received signals. This function is useful when there is strong interference from adjacent frequencies.
Press [ATT/ F LOCK] to toggle the Attenuator ON and OFF.
“ATT” appears when the function is ON.
The ON/OFF setting will be automatically stored in the current band. Each time you select the same frequency band, the attenuator setting will be automatically recalled.
The frequency range of each band is shown below.
PRE-AMPLIFIER
Switching the Pre-amplifier OFF may help reduce interference from adjacent frequencies.
Press [PRE/ LOCK A] to toggle the Pre-amplifier ON and OFF.
“PRE” appears when the function is ON.
The ON/OFF setting will be automatically stored in the current band. Each time you select the same band, the same setting will be automatically selected.
The frequency range of each band is provided in the following table (under “ATTENUATOR”).
Note: If the same frequency (144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz) band is selected on both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver, the pre-amplifier can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers. This is because the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same antenna.
Note:
If the same frequency (144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz) band is selected on both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver, the attenuator can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers. This is because the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same antenna.
Available receiving frequencies in the above frequency bands vary, depending on the market code. Refer to the Specifications {page 106} for details.
If 118 ~ 135.995 MHz, 155 ~ 173.995 MHz or 220 ~ 229.995 MHz is selected for the sub-receiver, the pre-amplifier cannot be turned ON (K-type only).
57
MEMORY FEATURES
MEMORY CHANNELS
The TS-2000(X) provides you with 300 memory channels, numbered 00 to 299, for storing operating frequency data, modes and other information. Memory channels 00 to 289 are called Conventional Memory Channels. Memory channels 290 to 299 are designed for programming VFO tuning ranges and scan ranges. The data you can store is listed below:
Conventional memory is used for storing data you will often recall. For example, you may store the frequency where you regularly meet your club members.
retemaraP
ycneuqerfXRseY
ycneuqerfXTseY
edomXRseY
edomXTseY
seicneuqerfdnE/tratSoNseY
ycneuqerftesffOseYseY
noitceridtfihSseYseY
lennahC
982~00
lennahC
992~092
1
seY
)xelpmis(
1
seY
)xelpmis(
STORING DATA IN MEMORY
There are 2 methods used for storing transmit/receive frequencies and associated data in memory channels 00 to 289. Use either method, depending on the relationship of the receive and transmit frequencies you store:
Simplex channels: RX frequency = TX frequency
Split-frequency channels: RX frequency TX frequency
Memory channels 290 to 299 can also be used as simplex channels.
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, the frequency that includes the RIT or XIT offset will be stored.
Simplex Channels
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected.
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored. 3 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
edomesreveRseYseY
ezispetsycneuqerfXRseY
ezispetsycneuqerfXTseY
ycneuqerfenoTseYseY
ycneuqerfSSCTCseYseY
edocSCDseYseY
edomSCD/SSCTC/enoT
FFO/NO
seYseY
emanyromeMseYseY
tuokcoLlennahCyromeM
FFO/NO
1
Changing the data after recalling a memory channel overwrites the contents of the channel.
1
seY
seY
seY
)xelpmis(
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the storage process, press [CLR].
4 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to select a memory channel.
You can also select a channel by entering a 3-digit number, such as 012, using the numeric keys.
1
5 Press [M.IN] again to store the data.
The previous data stored in the channel is overwritten.
58
13 MEMORY FEATURES
Split-Frequency Channels
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is selected.
2 Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.
This frequency and mode will be used for transmitting.
3 Press [A/B] to select the other VFO. 4 Select the receive frequency and mode. 5 Press [SPLIT].
“SPLIT” appears.
6 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the storage process, press [CLR].
7 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to select a memory channel.
You can also select a channel by entering a 3-digit number, such as 012, using the numeric keys.
8 Press [M.IN] again to store the data.
The previous data stored in the channel is overwritten.
MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL
There are two modes which allow you to retrieve frequencies and associated data that you stored in a memory channel: Memory Recall and Memory Scroll.
Memory Recall:
In this mode, the transceiver receives and transmits using a frequency that you retrieve. You can temporarily change the frequency and associated data without overwriting the contents of the memory channel when Menu No. 06B is set to ON.
Memory Scroll:
Use this mode to check the contents of the memory channels without changing the current receive frequency. In this mode, frequencies you retrieve are not used for receiving and transmitting.
Memory Recall
1 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.
The memory channel that was last selected appears.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to select a memory channel.
Continuously holding down Mic [UP] or [DWN] steps the transceiver through the memory channels until the key is released.
Memory channels which contain no data are skipped.
You cannot change memory channels while transmitting.
3 To exit Memory Recall mode, press [VFO/M].
Note: Memory channels can also be changed while using the
TF-SET function.
Note: When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX while performing memory-VFO split operation, the subtone frequency for TX will be stored in the memory channel.
59
13 MEMORY FEATURES
Memory Scroll
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
The memory channel that was last selected
appears.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to step through the memory channels.
You can also change channels by entering a 3-digit number, such as 012, using the numeric keys, then pressing [ENT].
3 To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].
The transceiver re-displays the memory channel or VFO frequency that was selected before you activated Memory Scroll.
Note: Do not press [M.IN] again after entering Memory Scroll mode. Pressing [M.IN] results in over-writing the current VFO data to the memory channel you selected.
Temporary Frequency Changes
After retrieving frequencies and associated data in Memory Recall mode, you can temporarily change the data without overwriting the contents of the memory channel.
1 Access Menu No. 06B and select ON.
Skip this step when changing only the associated data (not the frequency).
2 Recall a memory channel. 3 Change the frequencies and associated data.
Use only the Tuning control to select a frequency.
4 If necessary for future use, store the changed
data in another memory channel. Refer to “Channel Channel Transfer” {page 61}.
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using the TF-SET function.
MEMORY-VFO SPLIT OPERATION
Under “ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS” {page 31}, you learned about split-frequency operation using two VFOs. Recalling a split-frequency channel is another way to perform split-frequency operation. If you access Menu No. 06A and select ON, you can also use a memory channel and a VFO together for this operation, as follows:
RX: Memory channel TX: VFO A or VFO B
RX: VFO A or VFO B TX: Memory channel
To use a memory channel for receiving: 1 Access Menu No. 06A and select ON. 2 Press [A/B] to select the VFO that you will use for
transmitting.
•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is
selected.
3 Select the frequency for transmitting. 4 Recall a memory channel by pressing [VFO/M]. 5 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a memory
channel to receive.
6 Press [SPLIT]. 7 The VFO A frequency appears on the sub-display.
If you want to use the VFO B frequency to transmit, press [SPLIT] again.
8 Press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] to transmit on the
frequency shown on the sub display.
9 Press [SPLIT] to exit the SPLIT operation.
If Split operation is still selected using VFO A or
VFO B, press [SPLIT] again to exit Split operation.
To use a memory channel for transmitting: 1 Access Menu No. 06A and select ON. 2 Recall a memory channel by pressing [VFO/M]. 3 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a memory
channel to transmit.
4 Press [VFO/M] to return to VFO mode. 5 Press [SPLIT]. The other VFO frequency appears
on the sub display for transmission (Normal SPLIT operation).
6 Press [SPLIT] again. The memory channel you
selected in step 3 appears on the sub-display for transmission.
7 Press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] to transmit on the
frequency in the memory channel.
8 Press [SPLIT] to exit SPLIT operation.
60
13 MEMORY FEATURES
MEMORY TRANSFER
Memory \ VFO Transfer
After retrieving frequencies and associated data from Memory Recall mode, you can copy the data to the VFO. This function is useful, for example, when the frequency you want to monitor is near the frequency stored in a memory channel.
1 Recall the desired memory channel. 2 Press [M
When a simplex channel is recalled, the
When a split channel is recalled, the RX
Note:
The Memory Channel Lockout status and the subtone frequency are not copied.
Pressing [M retrieved data copies the new data to the VFO.
Channel \ Channel Transfer
You can also copy channel information from one memory channel to another. This function is useful when storing frequencies and associated data that you temporarily change in Memory Recall mode.
1 Recall the desired memory channel {page 59}. 2 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].
3 Select the memory channel where you would
like the data copied, using the MULTI/ CH control.
4 Press [M.IN] again.
ss
sVFO/ MG.SEL].
ss
data is copied to VFO A or VFO B, depending on which VFO was used to recall the channel.
data is copied to VFO A and the TX data is copied to VFO B.
ss
s
VFO/ MG.SEL] after temporarily changing the
ss
982~00lennahC a 982~00lennahC
ycneuqerfXR ycneuqerfXT
XRrofedoM
XTrofedoM
noitceridtfihS
edocSCD
FFO/NO
emaNyromeM
a
a
a
a
ycneuqerftesffO
a
a
FFO/NOesreveR
a
petsycneuqerfXR
a
petsycneuqerfXT
a
ycneuqerfenoT
a
ycneuqerfSSCTC
a
a
SCD/SSCTC/enoT
a
a
lennahCyromeM
a
FFO/NOtuokcoL
982~00lennahC a 992~092lennahC
ycneuqerfXR
ycneuqerfXT XRrofedoM XTrofedoM
noitceridtfihS
edocSCD
FFO/NO
emaNyromeM
a
a
a
a
ycneuqerftesffO
a
a
FFO/NOesreveR
a
petsycneuqerfXR
a
petsycneuqerfXT
a
ycneuqerfenoT
a
ycneuqerfSSCTC
a
a
SCD/SSCTC/enoT
a
a
lennahCyromeM
a
FFO/NOtuokcoL
ycneuqerfXR/XT
)xelpmis(
XR/XTrofedoM
)xelpmis(
ycneuqerftesffO
noitceridtfihS
FFO/NOesreveR
ycneuqerfXR/XT
)xelpmis(pets
ycneuqerfenoT
ycneuqerfSSCTC
edocSCD
SCD/SSCTC/enoT
FFO/NO
emaNyromeM
lennahCyromeM
FFOtuokcoL
992~092lennahC a 982~00lennahC
a
ycneuqerfXR
ycneuqerfXR/XT
a
a
ycneuqerfXT
XRrofedoM
XR/XTrofedoM
a
ycneuqerftesffO
a
noitceridtfihS
ycneuqerfXR
)xelpmis(pets
ycneuqerfXT XRrofedoM XTrofedoM
ycneuqerftesffO
noitceridtfihS
edocSCD
FFO/NO
emaNyromeM
FFO/NOesreveR
petsycneuqerfXR petsycneuqerfXT
ycneuqerfenoT
ycneuqerfSSCTC
edocSCD
SCD/SSCTC/enoT
When copying a memory channel 290 ~ 299 a channel 290 ~ 299, Memory Channel Lockout status changes to OFF, regardless of the original channel settings.
The tables above illustrate how data is transferred between memory channels.
a
FFO/NOesreveR
a
a
ycneuqerfXR/XT
a
ycneuqerfenoT
a
ycneuqerfSSCTC
a
a
SCD/SSCTC/enoT
a
a
lennahCyromeM
a
FFO/NOtuokcoL
XTrofedoM
ycneuqerftesffO
noitceridtfihS
FFO/NOesreveR
petsycneuqerfXR
petsycneuqerfXT
ycneuqerfenoT
ycneuqerfSSCTC
edocSCD
SCD/SSCTC/enoT
FFO/NO
emaNyromeM
lennahCyromeM
FFOtuokcoL
FFO/NO
emaNyromeM
lennahCyromeM
FFOtuokcoL
61
13 MEMORY FEATURES STORING FREQUENCY RANGES
Memory channels 290 to 299 allow you to store frequency ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan. Program Scan is described in the next chapter. To tune or scan frequencies within a specified range, store the start and end frequencies for that range in advance.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B. 2 Select the desired start frequency. 3 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.
To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the storage process, press [CLR].
4 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel in the range of
290 to 299.
You can also select a channel by entering a 3-digit number, such as 290, using the numeric keys.
5 Press [M.IN] to store the start frequency in the
memory channel.
“CLOSE INPUT” appears on the sub dot-matrix display.
1 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to select a memory channel from 290 to 299.
Now you can only tune from the start frequency to the end frequency, using the MAIN control.
Note: Pressing [UP]/ [DWN] or turning the MULTI/ CH control results changing the memory channel number while in Programmable VFO mode.
Memory Channel Lockout
You can lock out memory channels that you prefer not to monitor during Memory Scan. Memory Scan is described in the next chapter {page 68}.
1 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select the memory channel.
3 Press [CLR] momentarily.
Pressing [CLR] for more than approximately 2 seconds erases the contents of the memory channel.
A dot appears beside the right-most digit of the memory channel number to indicate the channel has been locked out.
6 Turn the MAIN control or the MULTI/ CH control to
select the end frequency.
7 Press [M.IN] to store the end frequency in the
memory channel.
The previous data stored in the channel is overwritten.
Confirming Start/End Frequencies
Use this procedure to check the start and end frequencies that you stored in channels 290 to 299.
1 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]
or [DWN] to select a memory channel from 290 to 299.
3 Press [–] to check the start frequency and [+]
to check the end frequency.
Programmable VFO
Using the start and end frequencies that you stored in channels 290 to 299, Programmable VFO restricts the frequency range that you can tune with the Tuning control. One application of this function is to help you operate within the authorized frequency limits of your license.
Repeatedly pressing [CLR] toggles between adding and removing the channel from the scan list.
ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS
If there are memory channels that you will not recall in the future, you may prefer erasing the contents of those channels.
1 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select the memory channel.
You can also select a channel by entering a 3-digit number, such as 012, using the numeric keys.
3 Press and hold [CLR] for approximately two
seconds.
A long beep sounds to confirm that the channel data has been erased.
62
13 MEMORY FEATURES
´
y
ˆ
S
´
Y
ˆ
s
Additional characters for all E-types
Available characters
FMTD
yek
sretcarahcelbaliavA
1qz1QZ 2abc2ABC 3def3DEF 4ghi4GHI 5jkl5JKL 6mno6MNO 7 p r s7PRS 8 tuv8TUV 9wxy9WXY 0ecaps0
#
?!' .,–/
&#( )<>;
:"@
*noitcnufoN AthgirrosrucehtevoM BtfelrosrucehtevoM
CretcarahcdetcelesehteteleD DsaemaS ]NI.M[]NI.M[
]NI.M[
]NI.M[]NI.M[ yek
MEMORY CHANNEL NAME
You can assign a name to each memory channel. A maximum of 7 alpha-numeric characters can be stored.
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP] or
[DWN] to select a memory channel.
3 Press [DISP].
4 Press [+]/ [–] or turn the MULTI/ CH control to
select the desired alpha-numeric character. You can move the cursor to the left by pressing [MAIN], or to the right by pressing [SUB]. Or, you can use an optional DTMF microphone to enter alpha-numeric characters.
Note: Alpha-numeric entries are limited to those characters shown in the following DTMF character table when you are using a DTMF Mic.
5 After selecting all the necessary characters for the
memory channel name, press [M.IN] to store the name, or press [DISP] to select a Memory Group. You can select only one of 10 groups (0 to 9). Enter the desired group number by pressing a numeric key. The selected group is shown in a larger font. After selecting a group, press [M.IN] to store the name and group number in the memory channel.
Alpha-numeric characters
ABCDEFGHI J KLMNOPQRST UVWXYZ [ \ ] ^ _`abcdefgh
i j k lmnopqr
stuvwxyz{|
}~PS!"#$%&’
()*+,–./01 23456789: ; <=>?@
АБВГДЕЖЗИЙ КЛМНОП ÑÒÓ ÔÕÖ ШЩЪЫЬ
ЯŒабвгдеж
зийклмноп стуфхцœшщъ ыь Ÿÿ
Available characters using a DTMF Mic
6 When you recall a memory channel with a name,
the name is displayed on the dot-matrix display along with the memory channel number and group number {page 64}.
63
13 MEMORY FEATURES
dnaycneuqerfAOFV
edomgnitarepo
dnaycneuqerfBOFV
edomgnitarepo
FFO/NOreviecer-buS
ycneuqerfreviecer-buS
edomgnitarepodna
FFO/NOTIRFFO/NOTIX
ycneuqerftesffoTIX/TIRhtdiwdnabretlifrevieceR
FFO/NOreknalBesioNFFO/NOENIF
noitcudeResioNPSD
2/1/FFO
lecnaCtaeBPSD
FFO/NO
hctoNotuAPSD
FFO/NO
snoitcnufXR/XT
24.911
Memory 0
144.005
Memory 1
14.235
Memory 2
441.250
Memory 3
18.111
Memory 4
50.015
Memory 5
7.082
Memory 6
29.610
Memory 7
3.545
Memory 8
145.250
Memory 9
21.005
Memory 0
24.911
Memory 1
144.005
Memory 2
14.235
Memory 3
441.250
Memory 4
18.111
Memory 5
50.015
Memory 6
7.082
Memory 7
29.610
Memory 8
3.545
Memory 9
14.085
Memory 0
21.005
Memory 1
24.911
Memory 2
144.005
Memory 3
14.235
Memory 4
441.250
Memory 5
18.111
Memory 6
50.015
Memory 7
7.082
Memory 8
29.610
Memory 9
New data
New data
New data
MEMORY GROUP
To manage 300 memory channels, you can divide them up into a maximum of 10 groups (Groups 0 to 9). After you configure a Memory Group, you can select one or more of the Memory Groups you want to recall, in Memory Recall mode. As a default, all memory channels are stored in Group 0.
To change the Memory Channel Group:
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode. 2 Select the desired memory channel for which you
want to change the Memory Group by turning the
MULTI/ CH control.
3 Press [DISP].
The Memory Name input prompt appears.
4 Press [DISP] again to skip the input or enter a
Memory Name using [+]/ [–] and [MAIN]/ [SUB] {page 63}.
The current Memory Group appears in a larger font.
QUICK MEMORY
Quick memory is designed to quickly and temporarily save data without specifying a particular memory channel. Use Quick memory to store data you will not use in future operating sessions. For example, as you tune across the band looking for DX, it is convenient to store stations that you want to contact. You can quickly jump between several different memory channels as you monitor them.
This transceiver provides ten Quick memory channels (“0_” to “9_”) that can store the following data:
5 Press a numeric key to change the selected
Group number. The newly selected Group number appears in a larger font.
6 Press [M.IN] to store the settings.
Memory Group Select
After you configure Memory Groups to the Memory Channels, you can select one or more of the Groups to be recalled in Memory Recall mode.
To select Memory Groups: 1 Press [FUNC], [M
ss
sVFO/ MG.SEL] to enter
ss
Memory Group Select mode.
2 Numbers 0 ~ 9 appear in the main dot-matrix
display. The selected Memory Group numbers are displayed in larger fonts. To change the selection, press a numeric key. To select all the Memory Groups, press [•/ DCS/SEL]. At least, one Memory Group must be selected.
3 Press [M.IN] to save the setting and exit. 4 You can now recall only the selected Memory
Groups in Memory Recall mode.
STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY
Each time you store a new frequency, all previously stored frequencies are bumped to the next respective Quick memory channel. When all ten memory channels contain frequencies, storing one more frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 9 off the stack (the data is lost).
The following diagram illustrates how the Quick Memory stacks the data in memory each time you press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
64
13 MEMORY FEATURES
You can store data in the Quick Memory only when using VFO frequencies for both transmitting and receiving.
1 Select the frequency, mode, etc. on the main
transceiver or sub-receiver VFO.
2 Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
Each time QUICK MEMO [M.IN] is pressed, the current VFO data is written to the Quick Memory.
Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, this ON status and the offset will also be stored.
RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS
You can recall a Quick Memory channel only when using VFO frequencies for both transmitting and receiving.
1 Press QUICK MEMO [MR].
The current memory channel number appears.
QUICK MEMORY VFO TRANSFER
This function copies the contents of the recalled memory channel to the VFO.
1 Recall a Quick Memory channel. 2 Press [M
Note: Pressing [M
recalled data copies the new data to the VFO.
ss
sVFO/ MG.SEL].
ss
ss
s
VFO/ MG.SEL] after temporarily changing the
ss
If there is no data stored in any Quick memory channel or data cannot be recalled to the current VFO, an error beep sounds.
2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a Quick
memory channel (0 to 9).
You cannot change memory channels while transmitting.
3 To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.
Note: Memory channels cannot be changed while using the
TF-SET function.
TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES
After recalling a Quick memory channel, you can temporarily change the data without overwriting the contents of the channel. You can change the frequency even when you select OFF in Menu No. 06B.
1 Press QUICK MEMO [MR]. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a Quick
memory channel (0 to 9).
3 Change the frequencies and associated data. 4 To store the changed data in the Quick memory,
press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
This action stores the new data in the current
channel and bumps the old frequency to the next higher Quick memory channel.
5 To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.
Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using
the TF-SET function.
65
SCAN
Scan is a useful function for hands-off monitoring of your favorite frequencies. By becoming comfortable with all types of Scan, you will increase your operating efficiency.
This transceiver provides the following types of scans.
epyTnacS esopruP
nacSOFV
lamroN
nacS
margorP
nacS
nacSzHM
992~092slennahc
egnarzHM1a
lennahC-llA
yromeM
nacS
llaC
nacS
nacS
nacSpuorG
OFV
yromeM
992ot00morf
spuorglennahc
ehtfodnaberitneehtsnacS
detcelesuoyycneuqerf
ycneuqerfcificepsehtsnacS
yromeMniderotssegnar
nihtiwseicneuqerfehtsnacS
,slennahcyromeMllasnacS
yromeMcificepsehtsnacS
dnalennahcllaCehtsnacS
ycneuqerfOFVtnerruceht
dnalennahcllaCehtsnacS
lennahC
gnitarepotnerrucehtsnacS
asallewsaycneuqerf
forebmundeificeps
OFV
lausiV
*nacS
wolebdnaevobaseicneuqerf langisehT.ycneuqerftaht silennahchcaefohtgnerts
hparg-rabanideyalpsid
slennahcyromeMehtsnacS
yromeM
lennahC
langisehtsyalpsiddna
anilennahchcaefohtgnerts
hparg-rab
* Visual Scan graphically shows how frequencies in a specific range
are busy.
Note:
While using CTCSS or DCS, Scan stops only for the signals that contain the same CTCSS tone or DCS code that you selected.
When using S-meter Squelch, Scan stops when the received signal strength matches or exceeds the S-meter setting. Scan resumes 2 seconds after the signal level drops below the S-meter setting.
Pressing and holding Mic [PTT] causes Scan to stop if it is functioning on a non TX band. Pressing [PTT] on the scanning band causes Scan to stop.
Starting Scan switches OFF the Automatic Simplex Checker .
NORMAL SCAN
When you are operating the transceiver in VFO mode, 2 types of scanning are available.
VFO Scan The transceiver scans the entire band of the
frequency you selected. For example, if you are operating and receiving on the main transceiver’s VFO A at 14.195.00 MHz, it scans all the frequencies in the range of 30.00 kHz to
60.00000 MHz. (Refer to VFO frequency range in the Specifications.)
Program Scan By programming the start and end frequency in
Memory channels 290 ~ 299 {page 62}, you can limit the scanning frequency range. Since there are 10 memory channels (290 ~ 299) available for specifying the start and end frequency, you can select one or more (a maximum of 10) ranges to scan. This is useful when you are waiting for a DX station on a certain frequency but the station may appear on slightly higher or lower frequency.
VFO SCAN
VFO Scan scans the entire frequency range that is available for the current VFO. When the Program Scan frequency range is not programmed or no Scan Group is selected for the Program Scan, the transceiver also scans the entire frequency range available for the current VFO.
If one or more Program Scan frequency ranges are programmed in memory channels 290 to 299:
lennahcyromeMdetceleseht
1 Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL]. 2 If one or more memory channels are selected for
the Program Scan, the selected channels are displayed in a larger font on the main dot-matrix display.
In this case, press [•/ DCS/SEL] to temporarily deselect all the channels. When there are no Scan Group channels selected, “VFO SCN MODE” appears on the sub dot-matrix display.
3 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to return to the current
VFO mode.
4 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the VFO Scan.
Note:
While scanning, you can change the scan speed by turning the RIT/ SUB control. Turn the control clockwise/ counterclockwise to decrease/ increase the scan speed. The speed indicator appears on the main dot-matrix display, where P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest.
You cannot change the VFO Scan speed in FM mode.
You cannot change the VFO Scan speed on the sub-receiver .
66
14 SCAN
PROGRAM SCAN
Program Scan monitors the range between the start and end frequencies that you have stored in Conventional memory channels 290 to 299. Refer to “STORING FREQUENCY RANGES” {page 62} for details on how to store the start and end frequencies.
You can select a maximum of 10 memory channels (Memory channels 290 to 299) and sequentially scan the ranges that you stored in these channels. Program Scan starts with the smallest channel number and repeats the sequence as described below.
1 Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.
If you are operating the sub-receiver, press
[VFO/M] to select VFO mode.
2 Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL].
3 If no Program scan channel is selected, all memory
channel numbers (from 290 to 299) are displayed in small fonts. Only the one’s digit of each memory channel is displayed on the main dot-matrix display . 0 represents channel 290, 1 represents channel 291, 2 represents channel 292, etc.
4 To select the Program scan frequency range,
press a numeric key 0 to 9. For example, press [3] for channel 293 only or press [3], [5], [7] to select channels 293, 295, and 297. When a channel is selected for the Program Scan, the number is displayed in a larger font.
To temporarily deselect all the channels (290 to 299) so that you can perform the VFO Scan, press
[•/ DCS/SEL]. (Refer to “VFO SCAN” on page 66)
Note:
At least one of the valid Program Scan channels (from 290 to 299) must be programmed and selected to perform the Program Scan. If no Program channel is selected or available for the Program Scan, the transceiver performs the VFO Scan.
When performing the Program Scan on the sub-receiver, the frequencies must be within the sub-receiver frequency range limitations. Otherwise, the Program Scan cannot be performed. The same conditions apply to the main transceiver.
While in FM mode, Scan automatically stops
on a frequency where a signal is present. The transceiver will either remain on that channel for a short time (Time-operated mode) or until the signal drops out (Carrier-operated mode), depending on which mode you select via Menu No. 10 {page 68}.
6 To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].
Note:
If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Program Scan, the sub-receiver automatically skips the memory channels that cannot be scanned on the sub-receiver. The same conditions also apply to the main transceiver.
If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise, far beyond the squelch threshold when in FM mode, Scan may fail to stop at a channel where a signal is present. If this happens, turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control slightly counterclockwise.
If you press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] before storing any frequency range for memory channels 290 to 299, the transceiver starts VFO scan.
When the current receive frequency is within one of the ranges that you selected with channel numbers, Scan starts with the current frequency. The operating mode stored in the memory channel is used.
When the current receive frequency is outside all the ranges that you selected with the channel numbers, Scan starts with the start frequency stored in the smallest channel number.
The operating mode can be changed while scanning, but the memory channel is overwritten with the changed mode.
When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step of the MULTI/ CH control, turning the control clockwise causes Scan to jump to the start frequency, and counterclockwise to the end frequency.
Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
While in FM mode, the Program Scan monitors rounded off frequencies regardless of the Menu No. 04 setting.
You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.
PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED
You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for each memory channel from 290 to 299 so that the Program Scan slows down the scanning speed. To specify the slow down frequency points, first program the start and end frequencies into a memory channel (290 ~ 299) {page 62}.
1 Access Menu No. 07 to set the function ON
(default is OFF).
2 You can further configure the slow down frequency
width. Access Menu No. 08 to select the range from 100 Hz to 500 Hz (default is 300 Hz).
5 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the Program
Scan.
To quickly move towards a desired frequency while scanning, turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/[DWN].
When in a mode other than FM mode, turning the RIT/ SUB control clockwise decreases the scan speed, and counterclockwise increases the speed. The current scan speed is shown on the display; P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest.
Note: If you select, for example, 500 Hz for Menu No. 08, the Program Scan slows down to a ±500 Hz width, centering the frequency you marked below.
3 Press [VFO/M] to recall the memory channel
(290 ~ 299) for which you want to specify the scan slow down frequencies.
4 Press [–] or [+] to confirm the start ([–]) or end
([+]) frequency.
5 Turn the Tuning control to the center frequency
point that you want the Program Scan to slow down. Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] to mark the Slow down frequency point. The “ ” icon appears.
67
14 SCAN
6 Repeat step 5 to specify the center slow down
frequency points. You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for each channel.
7 If you want to clear the slow down frequency
points that you previously stored, press and hold QUICK MEMO [M.IN] for 1 second. A confirmation beep sounds and the transceiver clears all the slow down frequency points you specified in the memory channel.
Note: You must clear all the previous slow down frequency points; you cannot clear only specific points.
8 Press [VFO/M] to return to VFO mode. 9 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the Program Scan
with the slow down frequency point(s).
Note:
During the Program Scan, you can turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the scanning speed. Turn the control clockwise/ counter ­clockwise to slow down/ speed up the scan. The Program Scan speed indicator appears on the main dot-matrix display during the Program Scan; P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest.
You cannot change the Program Scan speed in FM mode.
You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver .
You cannot specify the Program Scan slow down frequency point for FM mode.
SCAN HOLD
This function stops Program Scan for approximately 5 seconds, then resumes Scan when you jump to the desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH control, or by pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN].
To use this function, access Menu No. 09, and select ON. The default is OFF.
Scan automatically stops at a channel where a signal is present, regardless of the operating mode. The transceiver will either remain on that channel for a short time (Time-operated mode) or until the signal drops out (Carrier-operated mode). Use Menu No. 10 to select either mode. The default is Time-operated.
SCAN RESUME METHOD
The transceiver stops scanning at the frequency (or memory channel) where a signal is detected. It then continues scanning according to which resume mode you have selected. You can choose one of the following modes. The default is Time-operated mode.
Time-Operated mode
The transceiver remains on a busy frequency (or memory channel) for approximately 6 seconds, then continues to scan, even if the signal is still present.
Carrier-Operated mode
The transceiver remains on the busy frequency (or memory channel) until the signal drops out. There is a 2 second delay between signal dropout and scan resumption.
1 Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu No. 10. 3 Press [+]/ [–] to select TO (Time-Operated) or CO
(Carrier-Operated).
MHz SCAN
When you operate the main transceiver or sub­receiver in VFO mode, you can scan an entire 1 MHz frequency range within the current VFO frequency.
1 Press [VFO/M] to select VFO mode. 2 Select the desired frequency to perform the MHz
Scan. If you want to scan the entire 145 MHz frequency, for example, select 145.650 MHz. Scan will operate between 145.00000 MHz and
145.99999 MHz.
3 Press and hold [1MHz/ SEL] to start the MHz Scan. 4 Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the scan
speed.
5 To stop the MHz Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or
[CLR].
Note:
You cannot change the MHz Scan speed in FM mode.
You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver .
MEMORY SCAN
Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which you have stored frequencies (All-channel Scan) or only a desired group of memory channels (Group Scan).
4 Press [MENU] to complete the setting and exit
Menu mode.
You can lock out the memory channels that you prefer not to monitor while scanning. To do this, refer to “Memory Channel Lockout” {page 62}.
ALL-CHANNEL SCAN
Use the following procedure to scan all the memory channels that contain frequency data in sequence, ignoring the Memory Group number.
1 Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode
via Menu No. 10.
2 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode. 3 Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust
the squelch threshold.
4 Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to enter Scan
Group Select mode.
The selected Groups appear in a larger font.
5 Press [•/ DCS/SEL] to deselect all Groups so that
the transceiver scans the memory channel sequentially, ignoring the Memory Group number data.
68
14 SCAN
6 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to return to Memory
Recall mode.
7 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start All-channel Scan.
Scan starts from the current memory channel and ascends up through the channel numbers (scan direction cannot be changed).
To jump to a desired channel while scanning, turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic
[UP]/ [DWN].
8 To stop Scan, press [SCAN] or [CLR].
Note:
If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Memory Scan, the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels that cannot be received by the sub-receiver. The same conditions apply to the main transceiver.
If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise, far beyond the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a channel where a signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL control slightly counterclockwise.
Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
GROUP SCAN
For the purpose of Group Scan, the 300 memory channels can be divided into 10 groups so that you can select one or more groups to be scanned, depending on the situation.
When you store frequency data in a memory channel {page 58}, the transceiver automatically adds the default Group 0 (zero), to the memory channel data.
To recall the existing memory channel data and revise the Group number:
1 Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode. 2 Select the desired memory channel by turning the
MULTI/ CH control.
3 Press [DISP].
The Memory Name input prompt appears. Press [DISP] again to skip the input or enter a Memory Name using [+]/ [–] and [MAIN]/
[SUB] {page 63}.
4 Press the desired Group number ([0] to [9]) using
the numeric keypad. The selected Group number appears in a larger font.
Note: You can select only one of 10 groups (0 to 9) for each memory channel.
5 Press [M.IN] to store and overwrite the new
channel data to the memory channel.
6 Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each memory
channel you want to assign to a specific group.
You can select a maximum of 10 groups and sequentially scan the channels that belong to those groups. Group Scan starts with the smallest group number and repeats the sequence, for example, group 3 group 5 group 7 group 3.
1 Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode
via Menu No. 10.
2 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode. 3 Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust
the squelch threshold.
4 Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to enter Scan
Group Select mode. Then, using the numeric keypad, enter the group numbers you want to scan. i.e.- Press [3] for group 3, or press [3], [5], [7] for groups 3, 5, and 7. The selected Memory Groups appear in a larger font.
5 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to exit Scan Group Select
mode.
6 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to start Memory
Group Scan.
Scan ascends up through the channel numbers (scan direction cannot be changed).
To jump to a desired channel while scanning, turn the MULTI/ CH control or press Mic
[UP]/ [DWN].
7 To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR]. After using Group Scan, press [FUNC],
[SCAN/ SG.SEL], then [•/ DCS/SEL] to deselect all
the Group numbers you selected in step 4. This returns you to All-channel Scan (factory default).
Note:
If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Group Scan, the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels that cannot be received by the sub-receiver. The same conditions apply to the main transceiver.
If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise, far beyond the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a channel in which a signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL control slightly counterclockwise.
When the current channel is within one of the groups that you selected, Scan starts with the current channel.
When the current channel is outside all the groups that you selected, Scan starts with the group number that is larger than and closest to the group number of the current channel.
Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.
CALL SCAN
A Call channel can be stored for each operating band, such as HF, 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000 Optional) bands. You can monitor one of these Call channels and the current operating frequency alternatively.
1 Select the frequency you want to monitor.
In VFO mode, press [A/B] to select VFO A or B for the main transceiver or press [SUB] or [CTRL] to select the sub-receiver VFO. Then, turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired frequency.
In Memory Recall mode, press [VFO/M] to select the memory channel you want to monitor by turning the MULTI/ CH control.
2 Press [CALL/ C.IN] to recall the Call channel for
the frequency band.
69
14 SCAN
3 Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL]. 4 The Call channel and the selected VFO frequency
or memory channel are monitored alternatively.
5 To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].
VISUAL SCAN
While you are receiving, Visual Scan allows you to monitor frequencies near the current operating frequency. Visual Scan graphically displays how all frequencies in the selected range are busy. You will see a maximum of 7 segments, for each frequency (channel) point that represent relative S-meter levels.
Determine the scan range by selecting the center frequency and the number of channels. The default number of channels is 61.
Using Visual Scan (VFO)
1 Select the desired band for Visual Scan. 2 Turn the Tuning control, or press Mic [UP]/
[DWN], to select the operating frequency.
This frequency will be used as the center frequency.
3 Press and hold [DISP] for approximately
1 second to start Visual Scan (VFO).
Changing the Number of Channels to Scan
1 Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu
No. 11.
3 Press [+] or [–] to select 31, 61 (default), 91 or
181 channels for the number of channels to scan.
4 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
Note:
The current frequency step of the MULTI/ CH control is used for the Visual Scan.
While performing the Visual Scan, the DUAL WATCH function {page 47} is temporarily disabled unless you are using the 144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz in FM or AM mode and the Control Band for the main transceiver.
If you start the Visual Scan from the frequency on the sub­receiver, the frequency is transferred to the main display, then the Visual Scan starts.
If you start the Visual Scan in Memory Recall mode, the memory channel frequencies will be scanned.
If the frequency range specified for Program Scan or Program VFO is narrower than the range specified for Visual Scan, the range for Program Scan or VFO will be used for Visual Scan.
Visual Scan stops when you transmit.
Depending on the transceiver conditions, Visual Scan and the S-meter level may differ.
The center frequency is displayed on the main frequency display and the current scanning frequency is displayed on the sub frequency display. The operating mode and the number of channels to be scanned are displayed on the main dot-matrix display. The sub dot-matrix display shows the relative S-meter level of each frequency point, vertically.
To pause Scan, press [DISP]. “P” appears on the main dot-matrix display. While the Visual Scan is paused, you can monitor the paused frequency. Press [DISP] again to resume the Visual Scan.
4 To change the current scanning frequency, turn
the Tuning control or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].
The displayed frequency changes and the cursor moves.
Press [1MHz/ SEL] to make the current scanning frequency the new center frequency.
You can move the frequency using the MAIN control. If you want to revert to the original center frequency, press [FM/ AM/ NAR].
Using Visual Scan (Memory Channel)
1 Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode. 2 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu
No. 11.
3 Press [+] or [–] to select 31, 61 (default), 91 or
181 channels for the number of channels to scan.
4 Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode. 5 Press and hold [DISP] for approximately
1 second to start Visual Scan (Memory Channel).
The center memory channel number is displayed on the main frequency display and the current scanning frequency is displayed on the sub frequency display. The operating mode of the center memory channel and the number of channels to be scanned are displayed on the main dot­matrix display. The sub dot-matrix display shows the relative S-meter level of each frequency point, vertically.
5 To quit Visual Scan, press [CLR] or
[SCAN/ SG.SEL].
70
To pause Scan, press [DISP]. “P” appears on the main dot-matrix display. While the Visual Scan is paused, you can monitor the paused frequency. Press [DISP] again to resume the Visual Scan.
6 To change the current scanning frequency,
turn the MULTI/ CH control or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].
The displayed memory channel number changes and the cursor moves.
Press [1MHz/ SEL] to make the current scanning frequency the new center scanning channel.
7 To quit Visual Scan, press [CLR] or
[SCAN/ SG.SEL].
14 SCAN
71
OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
F
I
L
T
E
R
S
1
3
5
7
9
2
0
4
0
6
0
d
B
P
W
R
1
0
2
5
5
0
1
0
0
W
%
A
L
C
ALT (Auto Lock Tuning)
The ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) allows the transceiver to adjust the center receiving frequency automatically when you operate on the 1.2 GHz band in FM mode. When the receiving audio signal is distorted or breaking up, turn this function on to adjust the center receiving frequency . Some old 1.2 GHz transceivers do not have stable and precise oscillating circuits and tend to be slightly off (drifted from) the displayed frequency.
Press [FUNC], [XIT/ ALT] to toggle the ALT function ON or OFF.
“ALT” appears when the function is ON.
Note: The ALT (Auto Lock T uning) works only on the 1.2 GHz band in FM mode.
ANTENNAS
HF/ 50 MHz Band
Two antenna connectors are available for the HF/ 50 MHz band on the rear panel {page 13}. When you operate the main transceiver on these frequencies, you can select one of 2 antennas.
Press [FUNC], [A T/ ANT1/2] to select ANT 1 or ANT 2 for the main transceiver.
“ANT 1” or “ANT 2” appears to indicate which antenna is selected.
The ANT 1/ANT 2 setting will automatically be stored in the antenna band memory. Next time you select the same band, the same antenna will be automatically selected.
)zHM(egnaRycneuqerFnoitceleSannetnA
5.2~30.01.4~5.2
5.7~1.45.01~5.7
5.41~5.015.81~5.41
5.12~5.815.52~5.12
0.03~5.520.06~0.03
APO (Auto Power OFF)
You can set the TS-2000(X) to switch OFF automatically if no keys or controls are pressed or adjusted for a certain period of time. 1 minute before the transceiver switches OFF, “CHECK” is output in Morse code. You can select the time from OFF, 60, 120, and 180 minutes.
Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to access Menu No. 57.
Select the APO time from OFF, 60, 120, or 180 minutes.
Note:
The APO function works even if the transceiver is scanning.
The APO timer starts counting down the timer when no key presses, no control adjustments, and no command (RS-232C port) sequences are detected.
AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER
As explained in “ANTENNA CONNECTION” {page 1}, matching the impedance of the coaxial cable and antenna is important. To adjust the impedance between the antenna and the transceiver, you have the choice of using the internal tuner or an external tuner. This section describes how to use the internal tuner. For the external tuner, consult the instruction manual that comes with the tuner.
1 Select the transmit frequency. 2 Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT1/2] to select ANT 1 or
ANT 2.
If an external tuner is connected to the ANT 1 connector, select ANT 2 to use the internal antenna tuner. The internal antenna tuner is automatically bypassed if an external antenna tuner is connected to ANT 1.
3 Press [AT/ ANT1/2] momentarily.
•“AT” appears, indicating that the internal tuner is in-line (not bypassed).
Note: Connect an external antenna tuner to the ANT 1 connector only, then select ANT 1. The internal tuner will be automatically bypassed when the transceiver is switched ON.
VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHz Band
When you select the VHF, UHF, or 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 optional) band on the main transceiver and/or the sub-receiver, the following antenna is automatically selected based on the operating frequencies.
reviecsnartNIAM
)zHM(
441TNA
034TNA G2.1TNA
Note: The same antenna is shared and used when the main transceiver and sub-receiver are on the same band. The frequency coverage varies depending on the market codes.
72
)epyt-K(251~241
)sepyt-EllA(641~441
)epyt-K(054~024
)sepyt-EllA(044~034 )sepytllA(0031~0421
reviecer-BUS
)zHM(
)epyt-K(471~811 )epyt-K(003~022
)sepyt-EllA(641~441
)epyt-K(215~003
)sepyt-EllA(044~034
A/N
4 Press [AT/ ANT1/2] for more than one second.
CW mode is selected and tuning begins.
•“” blinks and the MAIN band LED lights red.
To cancel tuning, press [AT/ ANT1/2] again.
If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely high (more than 10:1), an alarm (“SWR” in Morse code) sounds and the internal tuner is bypassed. Before attempting to tune again, adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR.
5 See the display and check that tuning has
successfully finished.
If the tuning was successful, “AT ” stops
)zHM(egnaRycneuqerFteserPTA
58.1~30.005.2~58.1
525.3~05.2575.3~525.3
527.3~575.301.4~527.3
30.7~01.401.7~30.7
05.7~01.705.01~05.7
01.41~05.0105.41~01.41
05.81~05.4151.12~05.81
05.12~51.1205.52~05.12
00.92~05.5200.03~00.92
00.15~00.0300.25~00.15
00.35~00.2500.06~00.35
blinking and the MAIN band red LED turns off.
If tuning does not finish within approximately 20 seconds, an alarm (“5” in Morse code) sounds. Press [A T/ ANT1/2] to stop the alarm and tuning.
If you access Menu No. 27 and select ON, received signals will also pass through the internal tuner. When this function is ON, “RX AT” appears. This may reduce interference on the receive frequency.
Note:
The internal tuner will not tune outside the available transmission frequency limits.
Pressing [AT/ ANT1/2] for more than one second while transmitting, interrupts transmitting and starts tuning.
If you would like to use a separate receiving antenna, access Menu No. 18 and switch it ON. When this function is ON, received signals bypass the internal antenna tuner.
While using CW Full Break-in, the internal tuner will be in-line for both transmitting and receiving.
Tuning automatically turns OFF in approximately 60 seconds. “AT” disappears and the error beeps stop.
Tuning may still continue when the SWR meter indicates 1:1. This happens due to the tuning algorithm; this is not a malfunction.
Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment, the internal tuner may not retune. This happens because of an SWR calculation algorithm tolerance between 10 W (approx.) transmit power for tuning and 100 W transmit power.
If tuning does not finish even though the SWR meter indicates smaller than 3:1, adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR, then attempt to tune again.
Tuning may not reach an SWR of 1:1, depending on the transceiver conditions.
Presetting
After each successful tuning session, the AT Preset memory function stores the position of the tuning capacitor in the memory. The position of the capacitor is stored for each of the antenna tuner bands (see the following table) and for each antenna connector (ANT 1 and ANT 2).
Press [A T/ ANT1/2] momentarily.
•“AT” will appear, showing that the internal tuner is in-line (not bypassed).
Each time you go across the antenna tuner band, the AT Preset memory is automatically recalled to position the tuning capacitor without the need for retuning. If no preset data exists for a particular band/antenna combination, then the default data of 50 is used.
Note: Tuning may restart in order to obtain the optimum matching condition even though the current antenna tuner band has the preset data.
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
ATTENUATOR
The attenuator function is useful when extremely strong signals exist nearby your receiving frequency. When these type of signals exist nearby your receiving frequency, the AGC function may be erroneously controlled by the strong signals, rather than by the target receiving signal. If this happens, the target receiving signal can be masked and buried by the strong signals. In this case, turn the Attenuator function ON.
1 Press [ATT/ F LOCK]. 2 “ATT” appears.
To return to the normal operation, press [ATT/ F LOCK] again.
Note: If the same band is selected for both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver, the Attenuator function is on for both receivers.
AUTO MODE
You can configure a maximum of 29 points (HF/ 50 MHz), 9 points (144 MHz band), 9 points (430 (440) MHz band), and 9 points (1.2 GHz band) of the main transceiver VFO (VFO A and B) frequencies to change the operating mode automatically when you change the frequency.
As a default, the following modes are programmed on each operating band.
HF/ 50 MHz band
0.03 ~ 9.5 MHz: LSB
9.5 MHz ~ 60 MHz: USB 144 MHz band 142 ~ 152 MHz: FM 430 (440) MHz band 420 ~ 450 MHz: FM
1.2 GHz band (optional) 1240 ~ 1300 MHz: FM
To add the frequency points to the Auto Mode selection:
73
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
.oNlennahC ataD edomgnitarepO
0
zHM26.1
MA
zHM30.0
<MA
zHM26.1 zHM26.1
<WC
zHM0.2 zHM0.2
<BSL
zHM5.9
zHM5.9
<MF
zHM0.35 zHM0.35
BSU
zHM0.06
1
zHM0.2
WC
2
zHM0.7
BSL
3
zHM5.9
BSL
82
zHM0.35
MF
edoM tuptuOedoCesroM
BS··)L(
BSU–··)U(
W·–)C(
R-W···–)RC(
KS·)R(
R-KS···)RR(
NMA/MA–·)A(
NMF/M··)F(
1 Press and hold [USB/ LSB/ AUTO] + [ ] to turn
the transceiver ON.
2 Press [+] or [–] to select the band to add the
frequency points.
3 Select a memory channel number by turning the
MULTI/ CH control.
4 Turn the MAIN control to select a desired
frequency point to change the operating mode. Or, press [ENT] to enter the desired frequency point {page 37} using the numeric keys.
5 Press one of the mode keys to select the desired
operating mode.
The selected mode appears on the main dot­matrix display.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have added all the
data. 7 Press [CLR] to store the data. The table below shows the default Auto Mode
frequency points for the HF/ 50 MHz band. When you activate the Auto Mode selection by pressing [FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO], the transceiver automatically selects the mode; LSB for frequencies below 9.5 MHz and USB for frequencies greater than or equal to 9.5 MHz.
The next table is an example of adding 4 frequency points into memory. With this setup, the transceiver selects AM mode below 1.62 MHz, CW mode from
1.62MHz to 2.0 MHz, LSB mode from 2.0 MHz to
9.5 MHz, FM mode from 9.5 MHz to 53.0 MHz and USB mode from 53.0 MHz to 60 MHz. If multiple data contains the same frequency but a different mode is entered into memory, the lowest numbered memory channel is reflected as the Auto Mode.
.oNlennahC ataD edomgnitarepO
0 1 2 3
• 82
The table below is an example of how to add the frequency point of 1.62 MHz/ AM into memory. With this set up, the transceiver selects AM mode below
1.62 MHz, LSB mode from 1.62 MHz to 9.5 MHz and USB mode from 9.5 MHz to 60.0 MHz.
74
.oNlennahC ataD edomgnitarepO
0 1 2 3
• 82
BSL BSL BSL BSL
• BSL
MA
BSL BSL BSL
• BSL
zHM5.9 zHM5.9 zHM5.9 zHM5.9
zHM5.9
zHM26.1 zHM5.9 zHM5.9 zHM5.9
zHM5.9
<BSL
BSU
<MA
<BSL
BSU
zHM30.0 zHM5.9 zHM5.9
zHM0.06
zHM30.0
zHM26.1
zHM26.1 zHM5.9 zHM5.9
zHM0.06
To activate the AUTO MODE function, press [FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO].
BEEP FUNCTION
The Beep function provides you confirmation of entry, error status, and malfunctions of the transceiver. Although you can turn the beep function OFF by accessing Menu No. 12, we recommend you leave it ON in order to detect unexpected errors and malfunctions.
You can also change the output level of the beeps by accessing Menu No. 12 and selecting 1 to 9.
The transceiver generates Morse code to tell you which mode is selected when you change operating modes.
When you change operating Modes, the following Morse code sounds:
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
The transceiver also generates the following warning, confirmation, and malfunction beeps.
speeB snaemtitahW
peebtrohsdehctiphgihA.desserpsiyekdilavA
,detpeccasiyrtneyeKA
peebgnoldehctiphgihA
.detelpmocsah
peebtrohsdehctipwolA
edocesromni”LU
edocesromni”S“
edocesromni”5“
edocesromni”RWS
edocesromni”KCEHC“
edocesromni”TB“
edocesromni”RA“
.demrofrep
.emitdeificeps
.FFO
WCarofgnitiaW
.llufsiyromem
enutTAro,stratsnacS
sinoitarepodilavninA
tiucricLLPlanretniehT
ebtonnacenuTotuAWC
dilavninaro,detelpmoc
.deretnesiycneuqerf
ebtonnacenuTTA
ehtnihtiwdetelpmoc
ot)1:01revo(hgih .enuTTAmrofrep
OPAehterofebetunim1
noitcnuf)ffOrewoPotuA(
reviecsnartehtsehctiws
.dedrocerebotegassem
egassemtnerrucehT
CALL CHANNEL
A CALL channel is a frequency that is often used when looking for a station with which to make contact in FM mode. Each frequency band (HF, 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz, and 1.2 GHz) has one CALL channel. The default CALL frequencies are shown below.
To recall the CALL channel:
1 Press [CALL/ C.IN]. 2 Press [CALL/ C.IN] again to return to the previous
operating frequency. To revise the default CALL channel frequency: 1 Select a new CALL frequency and operating mode
on the VFO. 2 Press [FUNC], [CALL/ C.IN] to copy the new
frequency and mode to the CALL channel.
DISPLAY
BRIGHTNESS
The brightness of the LCD display can be selected from OFF, and 1 to 4 by accessing Menu No. 00.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 00.
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select OFF, 1, 2, 3, or 4. 3 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
.detcetedsisutatskcolnu
CONTRAST
The contrast of the LCD dot-matrix display can be selected from 1 to 16 by accessing Menu No. 59.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
ootsiRWSs’annetnaehT
access Menu No. 59.
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select an appropriate contrast
from 1 to 16.
3 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
KEY ILLUMINATION
The front panel key illumination can be switched ON or OFF.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 01.
2 Press [+]/ [–] to select ON or OFF. 3 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
DTMF
MANUAL DTMF DIALING
If you have an optional MC-52DM microphone, you can send DTMF tones while you are transmitting.
To send a series of DTMF tones:
1 Press Mic [PTT] or [SEND] on the front panel. 2 Press the desired DTMF keys to transmit.
DTMF tones are monitored through the speaker.
3 Release Mic [PTT] or press [SEND] to return to
receive mode.
dnaB
FHMF/zHM6.92
zHM05MF/zHM0.15
zHM441MF/zHM00.441
zHG2.1MF/zHM0421
1
All E-types2K-type
zHM)044(034zHM0.034
lennahCLLACtluafeD
edoMdnaycneuqerf
DTMF MEMORY
Entering DTMF tones
The transceiver has 10 DTMF Memory Channels. Each channel can store a series of 16 DTMF tones. You can also name each DTMF entry using a
1
2
zHM044,
MF/
maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters. 1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 45.
2 Press [SUB] to access Menu No. 45A. 3 Press [SUB] again to enter DTMF Memory
Channel mode.
75
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
4 Select a DTMF Memory Channel (0 to 9) using the
MULTI/ CH control. 5 Press [SUB] to enter the desired memory name.
Use [+] or [–] to select the characters. Press
[MAIN] or [SUB] to move the cursor left or right
while entering the DTMF memory name. You can
also use the Mic DTMF keys to enter the
characters. Refer to the table on page 63 for the
available characters and numbers.
6 Press [M.IN] to store the name into memory. 7 Select the desired DTMF tone using [+] or [–],
then press [SUB] to move the cursor to the right to
enter the next DTMF tone. 8 Repeat step 7 until you enter all the desired DTMF
tones. You can enter a maximum of 16 DTMF
tones for each DTMF Memory Channel.
DTMF Pause Period
In the DTMF Memory, you can enter blanks (pauses) among a series of DTMF tones. The default pause period is set to 500 ms, but you can change this value by accessing Menu No. 45C.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 45C.
2 Press [+] or [–] to select the desired DTMF Pause
period (default is 500 ms).
3 Press [MENU] to exit the Menu mode.
HF RX ANTENNA
If you have a separate HF antenna (below 30 MHz) only for receiving, connect the antenna coaxial cable to the HF RX ANT connector on the rear panel. This connector is considered to be connected to a beverage antenna or directional loop antenna for low­band operation.
To use the HF RX ANTENNA connector, access Menu No. 18 and select ON. When the HF RX ANTENNA is selected for receiving, “ ” appears on the display.
9 Press [M.IN] to store the data into memory.
Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data
To send the DTMF Memory Channel data while you are transmitting:
1 Press QUICK MEMO [MR] while you are
transmitting. 2 The DTMF Memory Channel number and the
memory name appear on the main dot-matrix
display. 3 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the DTMF
Memory Channel you want to transmit. 4 Press QUICK MEMO [MR] to transmit the DTMF
tones.
The DTMF tones are monitored through the speaker while they are transmitted.
DTMF Tone Time Length
When transmitting a series of DTMF tones, each tone duration is set to the 50 ms (tone)/ 50 ms (mute) format as default. Some repeaters or auto patch controllers may require longer DTMF tones and mutes.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 45B.
2 Press [–] to select SLOW. 3 Press [MENU] to exit the Menu mode.
LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL
When you connect an external HF linear amplifier to the TS-2000(X) transceiver using the REMOTE connector, select 1 (fast switching/ 10 ms delay) or 2 (slow switching/ 25 ms delay) to activate the internal relay so you can interface with the HF linear amplifier {page 94}.
Some linear amplifiers require a long transmission delay time because of the slow antenna relay switching time. In this case, select 2 for the slow switching.
If you have 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz, or
1.2 GHz band linear amplifiers, connect the linear amplifier control cable to the EXT.CONT connector for these bands {page 96}.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control
to select Menu No. 28A (HF), 28B (50 MHz), 28C (144 MHz), 28D (430 (440) MHz), or 28E (1.2 GHz).
2 Press [+] or [–] to select OFF, 1, or 2.
OFF disables the TS-2000(X) relay.
1 is 10 ms transmission delay.
2 is 25 ms transmission delay.
Note: If CW full break-in is enabled, 10 ms transmission delay is applied regardless of the Menu No. 28 settings.
The DTMF tones will now be sent using the 100 ms (tone)/ 100 ms (mute) format.
76
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
.N.A2/1TNAB=AB/A.C.BLLAC1HC 2HC3HCRLCLRTCENUTWCINOMPSD ENIFNI.M)OMEMKCIUQ(NI.M)OMEMKCIUQ(RM
Ms OFVrebmuNUNEMBN.R.NFFOzHM1
INOMXRNACSTILPSTES-FTM/OFV1ECIOV
2ECIOV
LOCK FUNCTIONS
FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION
Frequency Lock disables some keys and controls to prevent you from accidentally activating a function or changing the current settings.
Press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to toggle Frequency Lock ON or OFF.
“F LOCK” appears when this function is ON.
The following keys and controls are disabled by Frequency Lock:
HC/ITLUMHC/ITLUM
HC/ITLUMHC/ITLUM
gninuTgninuT
gninuTgninuT lortnoc
gninuT
B=ALLACRLC
KSF/WCPSIDTNE
MA/MFOTUA/BSU/BSLNI.M
Ms OFV
LTASLES.GS/NACSTILPS
NWOD/PUM/OFVLES/zHM1
CER/1HC/1CER/2HC/2CER/3HC/3
PETS/ENIF/9–/+
Note:
After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/ CH control and [+]/[–] are still available in Menu mode.
After activating Frequency Lock, you can still change the transmit frequency with the Tuning control while in TF-SET mode.
After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/ CH control is still available for selections other than frequency and memory channel changes.
After activating Frequency Lock, [CLR] may be available in some situations.
HC/ITLUM
lortnoc
OMEMKCIUQ
]NI.M[
B/A
OMEMKCIUQ
]RM[
Directly select a Menu No. without pressing [MENU] and turning the MULTI/ CH control.
Activate the same function as one of the front panel keys.
One of the following functions can be assigned to each PF key. Selecting OFF assigns no function to the PF key.
MONITOR
When you are receiving while the squelch function is ON, weak signals become intermittent.
Or, if the CTCSS function is ON, you may want to disable the squelch function temporarily to monitor the current channel activities.
In these cases, use the MONITOR function to disable the squelch function temporarily.
To assign the MONITOR function to a [PF] key on the front panel:
1 Press [MENU] and turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 51A.
2 Press [+] or [–] to select RX MONI. 3 Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.
Note: Y ou can also assign the MONIT OR function to a
programmable function key on an optional MC-47 microphone.
PF KEY
You can program the front panel [PF] key to assign a function that you frequently use. The default is Voice 1 for the optional Voice Synthesizer, VS-3 {page 91}. You can assign one of the functions in “MICROPHONE PF KEYS” to this PF key, accessing Menu No. 51A.
LOCK ALL FUNCTION
The Lock All function disables all the keys and controls on the TS-2000 transceiver, except [FUNC],
[PRE/ LOCK A], Mic [PTT] and [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK].
Press [FUNC], [PRE/ LOCK A] to toggle the Lock All function ON or OFF.
“LOCK A” appears when this function is ON. To return to normal operation, press [FUNC],
[PRE/ LOCK A].
MICROPHONE PF KEYS
When using the optional MC-47 or MC-52DM microphone, you can customize the functions of the Mic [PF]/ PF1, [MR]/ PF2, [VFO]/ PF3, and [CALL]/ PF4 keys. You can assign the following types of functions to these keys via Menu No. 51B ~ 51E:
RISE TIME OF CW
The rise time of a CW signal is the time for the RF output to rise to its maximum power after the key is closed. The default setting, 6 ms, is fine for slow to medium keying speed and normal weighting (dot/ dash ratio). The 4, 2 or 1 ms settings are good for faster keying speeds.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 32.
2 Press [+] or [–] to select the desired rise time
(default is 6 ms).
3 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
77
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
RX DSP EQUALIZER
EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO (SSB/FM/AM)
Use Menu No. 20 to change the receiver frequency responses of the target signal. You can select one from six different receiver profiles including the default flat response. Selecting any of the following items from the Menu causes “ ” to appear on the display.
Off (OFF):
The default frequency response for SSB, FM, and AM.
High boost (H BOOST):
Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective for a bassy voice.
Formant pass (F PASS):
Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies outside the normal voice frequency range.
Bass boost (B BOOST):
Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective for a voice with more high frequency components.
Conventional (CONVEN):
Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and higher.
User (USER):
Reserved for the ARCP software. Off is programmed at the factory as a default.
If you want to reverse the output: 1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 17.
2 Press [+] to select ON. 3 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
The output is now reversed.
Note: If you are using headphones, the transceiver mutes. The left channel represents the internal SP or EXT.SP1 and the right channel represents the EXT.SP2.
S-METER SQUELCH
The S-meter Squelch function opens the squelch only when the receiving signal has the same or greater strength than the S-meter Squelch setting. This function helps you to not open the squelch when receiving weak signals that you do not want to hear.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 19A.
2 Press [+] to select ON. 3 Turn the MAIN SQL control and/or the SUB SQL
control to adjust the S-meter Squelch threshold level. When you turn SQL control, the indicators on the S-meter move accordingly.
4 Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu
mode.
SEPERATE SPEAKER OUTPUT
The TS-2000(X) has 2 independent receivers and is capable of receiving 2 different frequencies at the same time. If no external speaker is connected to the TS-2000(X), both audio signals are mixed internally, then output through the internal speaker.
1 Connect the external speaker(s) to the EXT.SP1
and/or EXT.SP2 jack on the rear panel {page 2}.
2 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 16.
3 Press [+] or [–] to select 0, 1 or 2. 4 Press [MENU] to store the setting.
noitceleSuneM lennahc-L lennahc-R
0dexiMbuS&niaMdexiMbuS&niaM 1niaMbuS 2buS4/1+niaMniaM4/1+buS
If you are using an external speaker on EXT.SP2, you can configure the transceiver to make a separate output for each receiver.
TUPTUO
1PS.TXE 2PS.TXE
–– – –
√√
a a a a
lanretnI
)L(PS
A/NA/N
setuM A/N
A/N
setuM √√
)L(1PS )R(2PS
Note: The squelch threshold level of the S-meter squelch (both MAIN and SUB SQL) is around the 9 o’clock position for FM (both MAIN and SUB SQL), the 11 o’clock position for other modes (MAIN SQL), and the 9 o’clock position for AM (SUB SQL), regardless of the SQL controls position.
SQUELCH HANG TIME
You can adjust the squelch hang time to continuously monitor unstable signals. When the signal is temporarily weaker than the S-meter Squelch threshold level, the squelch does not mute the signal for a short period of time. In this way, you can continuously monitor the unstable signal.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 19B.
2 Press [+] or [–] to select OFF, 125 ms, 250 ms, or
500 ms.
3 Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu
mode.
TIME-OUT TIMER
The Time-out Timer limits the time of each transmission. It is also useful to prevent a long accidental transmission.
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 24.
2 Press [+] or [–] to select OFF, 3 minutes, 5 minutes,
10 minutes, 20 minutes, or 30 minutes.
3 Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu
mode.
78
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
dnaB edoM
32.oNuneM
FFO
32.oNuneM
NO
/zHM05/FH
zHM441
/WC/BSS
KSF/MF
W001~5
5fospetsni
W001~5
1fospetsni
MA
W52~5
5fospetsni
W52~5
1fospetsni
)044(034
zHM
/WC/BSS
KSF/MF
W05~5
5fospetsni
W05~5
1fospetsni
MA
W5.21~5
1fospetsni
zHG2.1
/WC/BSS
KSF/MF
W01~5
1fospetsni
MA
W5.2~1
1fospetsni
TNC
This transceiver has a built-in TNC that is usually used for the Packet Cluster Tune {page 53} or SkyCommand II+ operations {page 83}. However, you can also utilize the built-in TNC as a high speed (9600 bps) or normal (1200 bps) TNC that is controlled by an external PC that is connected to COM port on the rear panel {page 49}. Available TNC command set is listed in the Appendix.
If you desire, you can connect an external TNC or proprietary TNC/ MCP to ACC2 connector. To interface an external TNC/ MCP with the TS-2000(X), refer to the ACC2 connector information {page 95} and accessing Menu No. 50B ~ 50F then configure and adjust the Menu parameters to work with the external TNC/ MCP.
Note: You do not have to disable the built-in TNC to interface with an external TNC. Both the main transceiver and sub-receiver can work independently unless the transceiver is transmitting on the same band.
TRANSVERTER
If you have a transverter that converts the TS-2000 operating frequencies to other frequencies, you can use this TS-2000 transceiver as a transverter exciter. Consult the instruction manual that came with the transverter for interfacing to the TS-2000.
1 Connect the transverter to the ANT 1, ANT 2,
ANT 144, ANT 430, or ANT 1.2G (TS-2000
optional) connector on the rear of the transceiver.
TX MONITOR
TX monitor allows you to monitor the on-going transmission sound. This is convenient when you want to check the modulation sound quality of the transmission. In FSK mode, you can monitor the FSK signal that the TS-2000(X) is transmitting.
1 Press [FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI]. 2 The current TX monitor setting appears. 3 Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the monitor
sound level from OFF, and 1 to 9.
4 Press [CLR] to store the selected TX monitor
level.
Note:
We recommend you use headphones when you monitor SSB, AM, or FM mode, in order to avoid howling.
The CW transmission signal cannot be monitored using the TX monitor function. Use the CW sidetone function to monitor CW transmissions (Menu No. 13 and 31).
TX POWER
You can adjust the transmission output power by pressing [PWR/ TX MONI] and turning MULTI/ CH control. If more precise power adjustment is required, access Menu No. 23 and select ON. When this menu is ON, the power adjustment steps change as shown in the table below.
2 Select the exciter operating frequency on the main
transceiver of the TS-2000(X).
The transverter will use this frequency as the reference for converting frequencies.
3 Access Menu No. 25, and select ON by pressing
[+].
The output power is automatically set to the lowest power for that frequency. See TX POWER (below).
4 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit the
Menu mode.
5 Press [ENT], then set the target converting
frequency, using the numeric keys.
6 Press [ENT] to complete the entry. 7 The transceiver displays the target transverter
frequency instead of the actual operating frequency.
Note: When using a transverter, not all the functions of this transceiver are available.
Note:
The output power settings are stored independently for HF, 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430 (440) MHz and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 optional). As shown in the table above, you can also store different output power settings for AM and other modes for each operating band.
For AM mode in the 430 (440) MHz band and the 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 optional) band, the final step is 0.5 W, rather than 1 W.
79
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
QUICK DATA TRANSFER
This transceiver has the capability to quickly and conveniently transfer the receive frequency and mode to another compatible transceiver. Compatible transceivers include:
TS-2000(X) TS-570S/570D
TS-850S TS-870S
TS-690S TS-950SDX
TS-450S Data Transfer could be useful while contesting. A
spotting station that is searching for new contest multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to the running (main) station.
SETTING UP
Equipment Needed
In addition to a compatible transceiver, the following equipment is required:
Transfer to TS-2000(X), TS-570, or TS-870S:
One cross-wired cable. This cable must have a 9-pin RS-232C female connector at both ends.
Transfer to a transceiver other than TS-2000(X), TS-570, and TS-870S:
KENWOOD IF-232C interface unit.
One cross-wired cable. This cable must have a 9-pin RS-232C female connector at one end and a 25-pin RS-232C female connector at the other end.
One straight cable. This cable must have a 6-pin DIN male connector at both ends.
Connections
For diagrams on how to connect the two transceivers, see “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” {page 93}.
Note: If you are using a DSP-100 unit with the transceiver, turn on the transceiver first, then turn on the DSP-100.
USING QUICK TRANSFER
When connecting with another TS-2000(X), TS-570, or TS-870S, use the same COM connector baud rate on each transceiver. If transferring to or from other KENWOOD transceivers, select 4800 bps and 2 stop bits. On the TS-2000(X), set the parameter in Menu No. 56 to 4800 bps.
Transferring Data
The TS-2000(X) transceiver works as the Master, sending data to the Slave transceiver.
1 Switch ON the Transfer function of each
transceiver.
On the TS-2000(X), access Menu No. 52 and select ON. For the compatible transceiver, refer to the instruction manual that came with the transceiver.
2 On the Master, while in VFO mode, select an
operating frequency and mode.
3 On the Master, press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].
When using another TS-2000(X) as the Slave, “PC” appears on the Slave.
The displayed data is stored in Quick memory channel 0 on the Master and transferred to the Slave.
Note: If the Master has RIT switched ON, the offset frequency is added to the receive frequency to be transferred.
Receiving Data
The TS-2000(X) transceiver works as the Slave, receiving data from the Master transceiver. The Slave can receive data using either Quick memory channel 0 or the VFO.
1 Switch ON the Transfer function of each
transceiver.
On the TS-2000(X), access Menu No. 52 and select ON. For the compatible transceiver, refer to the instruction manual that came with the transceiver.
2 On the Slave, access Menu No. 53 and select
either OFF (QUICK MEMO channel 0) or ON (the VFO).
The default is OFF (QUICK MEMO).
3 On the Master, perform the appropriate operation
to send data.
For the correct method, refer to the instruction manual that came with the transceiver.
Note:
If you always use the TS-2000(X) for receiving only, activate the TX Inhibit function, accessing Menu No. 54 to avoid unintentional transmission.
When the Slave receives data using the VFO programmed with a simplex frequency, the received data replaces the data on both VFOs. On the Slave, both RIT and XIT are set to OFF.
When the Slave receives data using the VFOs programmed with split frequencies, the received data replaces the data only on the TX side of the VFO. On the Slave, XIT is set to OFF but RIT is not changed.
Note: While transferring data, other functions may work slower.
80
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
FMTD
yek
noitcnuF
CNUF edom
FMTD
yek
noitcnuF
CNUF
edom
1nacS–9
hcleuqS
1
nwoD/pU
2
/enoT
/SSCTC
SCD
edoC
tceleS
0
RWP
1
nwoD/pU
3VERTFIHSATNE– 4zHM–BLRTC
/NIAM
BUS
5INOM
KCOL
NO
2
CretaepeR–
61ecioV
KCOL
FFO
2
DCNUF
CNUF
FFO
7
emuloV
1
nwoD/pU
–nwoDnwoD
8
dnaB
1
nwoD/pU
–# pUpU
COMPUTER CONTROL
By connecting this transceiver to a computer, you can change the computer into an electronic console from which you can remotely control functions of the transceiver. This capability makes remote operation of your transceiver possible from across the room, from another room, or when coupled with other commercially available products and where lawful, from another city, state, or country via a telephone connection.
Note:
You can use the front panel controls while using computer control. Settings done from the front panel are effective immediately.
After the computer is disconnected or turned off, all values and settings on the front panel are restored.
SETTING UP
Equipment Needed
A PC equipped with an RS-232C serial port.
One straight cable. This cable must have a 9-pin D-Sub RS-232C female connector at one end, and at the other end a 9-pin or a 25-pin D-Sub RS-232C female connector that mates with the RS-232C port of your computer.
Transceiver control application.
REMOTE MICROPHONE CONTROLLER
If you have a DTMF microphone, you can use the microphone as a wired remote control unit as described below.
1 Plug the DTMF microphone into the microphone
connector of the transceiver.
2 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 45D.
3 Press [+] to select ON. 4 Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu
mode.
The DTMF keys function as follows:
To design your programs, consult “APPENDIX” for the necessary information.
Connections
Connecting the transceiver to the computer is easy. See the diagram given in “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” {page 93}.
Note: Before connecting this transceiver to the computer, switch OFF the power to both the transceiver and the computer.
COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS
In order to control the transceiver by computer, you must first choose the communication parameters.
1 On the computer, configure your transceiver
control application for 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and no parity.
2 On the transceiver, select the same transfer rate
and number of stop bits via Menu No. 56.
The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit.
Note: To reliably use the 38400 or 57600 bps transfer rates, the RS-232C port of the computer must support these high-speed communications parameters.
1
Use the [#] (Up) and [ ](Down) keys to change the settings of these functions.
2
The LOCK function is for the microphone keypad.
Note:
Microphone Remote does not function while transmitting.
You can use the DTMF Memory function {page 75} with the Microphone Remote function.
The Repeater function is available for K-type models only.
Normally, pressing [2] cycles through Tone, CTCSS, DCS, and OFF. However, if 1750 Hz is selected for Tone, pressing [2] will only transmit the 1750 Hz tone. To return to Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS mode, you must first deselect 1750 Hz for Tone.
Press [D] to enter FUNC mode, to use the 2nd function of the DTMF keys. Pressing [D] while in FUNC mode will exit FUNC mode.
[FUNC] on the transceiver works independently from the Microphone Remote [FUNC] key.
81
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
1NOSCD 9RM 2NOENOT 0WOL 3NOSSCTC ARETNE 4FFOSCD BLESENOT 5FFOENOT CNORETAEPER 6FFOSSCTC DFFORETAEPER 7LLAC NWOD 8OFV #PU
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL (K-type ONLY)
If you have a Kenwood TH-D7A handheld transceiver, you can use it to remotely control the 144 MHz and 440 MHz bands of the TS-2000(X) transceiver, using FM mode. You will be controlling one band on the TS-2000(X) transceiver while sending DTMF tones to the other band from the remote control transceiver. This function is useful, for example, when you want to control the VHF/ UHF FM repeater function of the TS-2000(X) transceiver from a location outside your home or vehicle.
Note:
T o remotely control the TS-2000(X), you can also use a handheld transceiver which does not have a remote control function, but a DTMF function. Y ou must, however, manually send DTMF tones for control code strings. Skip steps 1 and 3 in “PREPARATION”, below.
FCC rules permit you to send control codes only on the 440 MHz band.
PREPARATION
Assuming that the 144 MHz band of the TS-2000 transceiver will be controlled.
On the control transceiver: 1 Program a 3-digit secret number.
If you are using a TH-D7A, see “WIRELESS
REMOTE CONTROL” in its instruction manual.
2 Select the transmit frequency on the 440 MHz
band.
3 Enter the Remote Control mode. On the TS-2000 transceiver: 4 Access Menu 61C, and select the same secret
number that you selected in step 1.
5 Select the receive frequency on the 440 MHz
band of the sub-receiver.
Mate this frequency with the transmit frequency
on the control transceiver.
6 Select the 144 MHz band as the TX band or
Control band for the main transceiver.
7 To have the TS-2000(X) transceiver send a control
acknowledgment to the handheld, access Menu 61D and select “ON”.
DTMF tones which represent the secret
number will be used as an acknowledgment.
8 Access Menu 61E and select “ON”.
“LOCK A” appears when the TS-2000(X) enters
Remote Control mode.
CONTROL OPERATION
When in Remote Control mode, the DTMF keys of the control transceiver will function as shown in the table below. Each time you press the desired key, the transceiver will automatically enter transmit mode and send the corresponding command to the mobile.
Note: If you are using a transceiver without a remote control function, manually send “AXXX#YA#” where “XXX” is your 3-digit secret number and “Y” is a single-digit control command. If you do not add ”A#” on the end, you can skip sending “AXXX#” next time; however, the mobile may be accidentally controlled by other stations.
To change the transmit/ receive frequency: ([VFO] [ENTER] [0] ~ [9] (enter the necessary
digits) [ENTER]) or ([VFO] [UP]/ [DOWN]) To recall a memory channel: ([MR] [ENTER] [0] ~ [9] (enter the necessary
digits) [ENTER]) or ([MR] [UP]/ [DOWN]) To change the tone (or CTCSS) frequency: ([TONE SEL] [0] ~ [9] (enter 2 digits; ex. [0], [5])
[TONE SEL])
Use Nos. 01 to 38 shown in the table on page 35.
First activate the Tone or CTCSS function. You can select a separate tone frequency for the Tone and CTCSS functions.
Note: While in Wireless Remote Control mode, you can perform only the following operations on the TS-2000(X) transceiver.
Transmit
Secret Number Change
Acknowledge ON/ OFF
Partial/ Full Reset
82
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
SKY COMMAND II + (K-type ONLY)
The Sky Command II+ allows you to remotely control the TS-2000(X) transceiver from a separate location. Since the TS-2000(X) transceiver has an independent VHF and UHF sub-receiver in addition to the main transceiver, the sub-receiver can work as a “Transporter” without requiring another VHF/UHF transceiver.
So, if you already have Kenwood’s TH-D7A handheld or TM-D700A mobile transceiver, you can immediately start enjoying Sky Command II+ features to remotely control the HF/ 50 MHz band of your TS-2000(X).
Or, if you have a friend who has another TS-2000(X), you can also use his/her TS-2000(X) as a “Commander” (a remote unit) to control the HF/ 50 MHz band of your TS-2000(X) at home, using VHF and UHF bands.
You will use one transceiver as a remote control unit, called a “Commander”. The VHF/ UHF sub-receiver in the TS-2000(X) transceiver is called the “Transporter”. It will function as an interface between the Commander and the HF/ 50 MHz band of the TS-2000(X) main transceiver.
This system allows you, for example, to watch for and hunt DX while washing your car, or to operate the HF transceiver while relaxing in your car, living room, or patio, instead of actually operating inside your shack.
HF/ 50 MHz
VHF
UHF
Your shack
TM-D700A/ TH-D7A/ TS-2000(X)
SKY COMMAND II + DIAGRAM
VHF freq.
Audio
UHF freq.
Audios
Control commands
tResponse
Commander Transporter
Audio
Control commands
tResponse
PF
POWER
HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D
ATTPRE-AMP
VOX PROC
SEND
PHONES
N.R.
B.C.
CW TUNE
AT TUNE
FILTER
RIT/XIT
UP
DOWN
CH22CH3
CH1
MIC
LSB
MR
USB
1
3
+–
M.IN
ANT4REC5FINE
PWR
CW FSK
6
SPLIT
TF-SET
A/B
RIT
CH
MIC
NB7AGC/TONE8REV
KEY
FM AM
9
M/V
A=B
CLEAR
XIT
F.LOCK
DELAYMENU 1MHz
CLR
ENT
SCAN M>VFO M.IN
0
PREPARATION
Although you can use either a TM-D700A, a TH-D7A, or another TS-2000(X) transceiver as a “Commander” (an external remote control unit), the following procedure shows how to set up your TS-2000 as a “Transporter” at a base station and the TM-D700A as a “Commander”.
TS-2000 (Transporter) Setup:
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62A.
2 Press [SUB] then enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY)
as a “Commander” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the
MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press [MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62A.
3 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62B.
4 Press [SUB] then enter your alias callsign
(ex: WD6DJY-1) as a “Transporter” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press [MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the callsign to Menu No. 62B.
Note: Y ou can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and “-”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long, including “-”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be entered:
WD6DJYZ If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the
maximum length is 6 characters.
WD6-DJY-1 You cannot use more than 1 “-” within a callsign.
-WD6DJY You cannot use a “-” as the first callsign character .
WD6DJY-19 An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.
5 Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH
control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky Commander II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).
6 Access Menu No. 62D and select the
communication speed for Sky Command II+. Select 1200 bps for TM-D700A (9600 bps can be used only when you use another TS-2000(X) as a “Commander”).
7 Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB. 8 Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on
the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command operation.
DSP SLOPE HIGH
LOW
T
U
C
W
O
L
AF RF
46
28
010
IF SHIFT SQL
46
28
010
TM-D700A (Commander) Setup:
1 Access Menu 4–1 and 4–2 to enter the same
callsign that you entered for TS-2000(X).
2 Access Menu 4–3 to select the same CTCSS tone
frequency that you selected for TS-2000(X) (Transporter).
Note: Refer to Chapter 17, Sky Command II, of the TM-D700A instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and CTCSS tone frequency.
83
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
Starting Sky Command II+ operation:
After you have completed the following setups, you can start Sky Command II+ operation. Without programming these parameters, you cannot perform Sky Command II+ operation.
On the TS-2000 (Transporter):
1 Select the desired HF frequency that you want to
be controlled on the main transceiver.
2 Select an open VHF frequency in FM mode for the
main transceiver and another open UHF frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver.
3 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62E.
4 Select T-PORTER (Transporter). 5 Press [MENU] to enter the Transporter mode.
On the TM-D700A (Commander):
1 Select the same VHF and UHF frequencies that
you selected for the TS-2000 (Transporter).
2 Access Menu 4–4 to select COMMANDER.
“PRESS [0] KEY TO START COMMANDER!!”
appears.
3 Press [0] on the DTMF Mic of the TM-D700A to
start the Sky Command II+ operation.
CONTROL OPERATION
After setting up both the TS-2000 (Transporter) and the TM-D700A (Commander) for Sky Command II+ operation, press Mic [0] on the Commander. While in Sky Command mode, the Mic keys of the Commander will function as described below.
yeKciM noitcnuF
1 FFOrewoP 2 FFO/NOeviecerycneuqerfFH 3 hctiwsedomnoitaludoM 4 FFO/NOTIR 5 FFO/NOTIX 6 raelctesffoTIXrotesffoTIR 7 FFO/NOycneuqerf-tilpS 8 OFVotyromeMmorfrefsnarT
9
hctiwsBOFV/AOFV:edomOFVnI
egnahcon:edomllaceRyromeMnI
0 FHmorf(eveirtersgnittestnerruCreviecsnart) B hctiwsedomllaceRyromeM/OFV C esaercniycneuqerftesffoTIR/TIX D esaercedycneuqerftesffoTIR/TIX
1
hctiwszHk1/zH01
:edomWCro,BSU,BSLnI
hctiwszHk01/zHk1:edomMAroMFnI
2
#
NOyrtneycneuqerf:edomOFVnI
rebmunlennahc:edomllaceRyromeMnI
NOyrtne
1
“FS” appears when you select 1 kHz step (LSB/ USB/ CW) or 10 kHz step (FM/ AM).
2
After pressing Mic [#], press Mic [0] to [9] to enter a frequency or memory channel number.
When Mic [0] is pressed, the Commander shows the current settings of the HF transceiver:
w
q
u
Each time you press a key, the Commander will automatically enter transmit mode and send the corresponding control command to the Transporter.
FHehthctiwsoT
ciMsserP ]1[ .
FFOreviecsnart
ycneuqerfehtegnahcoT
ciMsserP ]PU[ / ]NWD[ .
nolennahcyromemro
reviecsnartFHeht
nanooiduatimsnartoT
ycneuqerfFH
]TTP[ ehtotnikaepsneht,
ciMdlohdnasserP
.enohporcim
nanooiduaevieceroT
ciMsserP ]2[ .
ycneuqerfFH
dnabFHUehtrotinomoT
ciMehtsserP FP yek
rednammoCehtno
.noitcnuf
84
eyr
q HF frequency w VFO: A, VFO: B,
MR: 00 ~ 99 (memory channel number)
e RIT, XIT r OFF, –9.99 ~ +9.99 t LSB, USB, CW, FM, or AM y SPLIT–A: VFO A is used for transmitting.
SPLIT–B: VFO B is used for transmitting. SPLIT–M: A memory channel is used for transmitting.
u “FS” appears when Mic [
Note:
After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4–4.
The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every 10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.
The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the Transporter is ON.
You must set VHF frequency on the main transceiver and UHF frequency on the sub-receiver. Otherwise, the Sky Command II+ may not operate properly.
When the TS-2000(X) exits the Sky Command II+ operation, the operating frequencies will be returned to their original frequencies (the frequencies before entering the Sky Command II+ operation).
t
] is pressed.
rotinoMehtotdengissa
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
FHehthctiwsoT
FFOreviecsnart
sserP ]REWOP[]REWOP[
]REWOP[
]REWOP[]REWOP[ .
anooiduatimsnartoT
ycneuqerfFH
ehtdlohdnasserP TTPTTP
TTP
TTPTTP
otnikaepsneht,hctiws
.enohporcimeht
nanooiduaevieceroT
ycneuqerfFH
sserP ]XR[]XR[
]XR[
]XR[]XR[ .
dnabFHUehtrotinomoT
rednammoCehtno
dlohdnasserP ]INOM[]INOM[
]INOM[
]INOM[]INOM[ .
USING TH-D7A AS A COMMANDER
To use a TH-D7A transceiver as a “Commander” (an external remote control unit), follow the steps below. Basically, it is the same as using a TM-D700A as a “Commander” (described on the previous page).
TS-2000(X) (Transporter) Setup:
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62A.
2 Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a
“Commander” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the
MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press [MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62A.
3 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62B.
4 Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a
“Transporter” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the
MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press [MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62B.
Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and “-”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long including “-”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be entered:
WD6DJYZ If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the
maximum length is 6 characters.
WD6-DJY-1 You cannot use more than 1 “-” within a callsign.
-WD6DJY You cannot use a “-” as the first callsign character .
WD6DJY-19 An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.
5 Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH
control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky Commander II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).
6 Access Menu No. 62D and select the
communication speed for Sky Command II+. Select 1200 bps for TH-D7A (9600 bps can be used only when you use another TS-2000 as a “Commander”).
7 Assign the TNC band to the sub-band by
accessing Menu No. 46 and select SUB.
8 Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on
the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command operation.
4 Set the same frequencies that you selected for the
“Transporter” for the VHF and UHF bands.
Note: Refer to Chapter 19, Sky Command II, of the TH-D7A instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and CTCSS tone frequency.
CONTROL OPERATION
First, switch the TS-2000 transceiver ON and select T-PORTER (Transporter) from Menu 62E.
Then, access Menu 4–4 on the TH-D7A and select “COMMANDER”. “PUSH [0] KEY TO START COMMANDER!!” appears.
Press [0] on the TH-D7A to start Sky Command mode.
When in Sky Command mode, the keys of the TH-D7A (Commander) will function as described below. Only [LAMP], [MONI], and the VOL control functions will not change.
Each time you press the desired key, the Commander will automatically enter transmit mode and send the corresponding control command to the TS-2000 (Transporter).
TH-D7A (Commander) Setup:
1 Access Menu 4–1 to enter the same callsign that
you entered for the Commander (ex: WD6DJY).
2 Access Menu 4–2 to enter the same callsign that
you entered for the Transporter (ex: WD6DJY-1).
3 Access Menu 4–3 to select the same CTCSS tone
frequency that you selected for the TS-2000(X) (Transporter).
85
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
yeK noitcnuF
gninuTgninuT
gninuTgninuT
gninuT
PUPUPUPUPU / NWDNWD
B/AB/A
B/AB/A
B/A
XRXRXRXRXR
TIRTIR
TIRTIR
TIR TIXTIX
TIXTIX
TIX
RLCRLC
RLCRLC
RLC
MMMMM VVVVV
1
EDOMEDOM
EDOMEDOM
EDOM
TILPSTILPS
TILPSTILPS
TILPS
lortnoc
REWOPREWOP
REWOPREWOP
REWOP
1
1
1
1
NWDNWD egnahctesffoTIXrotesffoTIR
NWD
1
1
1
egnahc
FFO/NOrewoP
FFO/NOeviecerycneuqerfFH
hctiwsedomnoitaludoM
FFO/NOTIR
FFO/NOTIX
raelctesffoTIXrotesffoTIR
FFO/NOycneuqerf-tilpS
OFVotyromeMmorfrefsnarT
:edomWCro,BSU,BSLnI
TSAF
1
CNYSCNYS
CNYSCNYS
CNYS
TNETNE
TNETNE
TNE
hctiwszHk1/zH01
eveirtersgnittestnerruC
)reviecsnartFHmorf(
NOyrtne
V/MV/M
V/MV/M hctiwsedomllaceRyromeM/OFV
V/M
1
After pressing [ENT], you can use these keys as numeric keys to enter a frequency or memory channel number.
When [0/ SYNC] is pressed, the Commander shows the current settings of the HF transceiver:
rebmunlennahcyromemroycneuqerF
hctiwsBOFV/AOFV:edomOFVnI
egnahcon:edomllaceRyromeMnI
NOyrtneycneuqerf:edomOFVnI
hctiwszHk01/zHk1:edomMAroMFnI
rebmunlennahc:edomllaceRyromeMnI
q e
yr u
q HF frequency w A (VFO A), B (VFO B),
00 ~ 99 (memory channel number)
e RIT, XIT r OFF, –9.99 ~ +9.99 t “FS” appears when [FAST] is ON. y LSB, USB, CW, FM, or AM u SPLIT–A: VFO A is used for transmitting.
SPLIT–B: VFO B is used for transmitting. SPLIT–M: A memory channel is used for transmitting.
Note:
On the Transporter, only [LAMP], [MONI], and [MENU] will function. Pressing any other key will simply cause the Transporter to generate an error beep.
After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4–4.
The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every 10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.
The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the Transporter is ON.
w t
86
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
lortnoC noitcnuF
NIAMNIAM
NIAM
NIAMNIAM lortnoc
gnitarepoehtlortnocotnruT
.ycneuqerf
HC/ITLUMHC/ITLUM
HC/ITLUM
HC/ITLUMHC/ITLUM
lortnoc
gnitarepoehtlortnocotnruT
.yldiparycneuqerf
]NIAM[]NIAM[
]NIAM[
]NIAM[]NIAM[
tnerrucehtrotinomotsserP
.ycneuqerfgniviecer
]BUS[]BUS[
]BUS[
]BUS[]BUS[
ehtllaezinorcnys-erotsserP
retropsnartehtneewtebnoitamrofni
.rednammocdna
]+[]+[
]+[
]+[]+[ / ]–[]–[
]–[
]–[]–[
ehtnwodropuevomotsserP
zHM05/FH(dnabgnitarepo
.)sdnaboidarruetama
]M/OFV[]M/OFV[
]M/OFV[
]M/OFV[]M/OFV[
edomOFVneewtebelggototsserP
.edomllaceRyromeMdna
]TNE[]TNE[
]TNE[
]TNE[]TNE[
ycneuqerfderisedaretneotsserP
arodapyekciremunehtgnisu
yromeMnirebmunlennahcyromem
.edomllaceR
M[M[M[M[M[
sssss
]OFV]OFV
]OFV
]OFV]OFV
yromemehtrefsnartotsserP
.OFVotnoitamrofnilennahc
]B/A[]B/A[
]B/A[
]B/A[]B/A[ .BroAOFVtcelesotsserP
]TILPS[]TILPS[
]TILPS[
]TILPS[]TILPS[
NOnoitarepoTILPSelggototsserP
.FFOdna
]BSU/BSL[]BSU/BSL[
]BSU/BSL[
]BSU/BSL[]BSU/BSL[ .BSUroBSLtcelesotsserP
]KSF/WC[]KSF/WC[
]KSF/WC[
]KSF/WC[]KSF/WC[
ebtonnacKSF.WCtcelesotsserP
.detceles
]MA/MF[]MA/MF[
]MA/MF[
]MA/MF[]MA/MF[ .MAroMFtcelesotsserP
]TIR[]TIR[
]TIR[
]TIR[]TIR[ / ]TIX[]TIX[
]TIX[
]TIX[]TIX[
TIXro/dnaTIRehtetavitcaotsserP
.noitcnuf
]RAELC[]RAELC[
]RAELC[
]RAELC[]RAELC[
ycneuqerftesffoehtraelcotsserP
.TIXro/dnaTIRrof
]CORP[]CORP[
]CORP[
]CORP[]CORP[
hceepSehthctiwsotsserP
.NOnoitcnuFrossecorP
].N.A[].N.A[
].N.A[
].N.A[].N.A[
hctoNotuAehtelggototsserP
.FFOdnaNOnoitcnuf
].C.B[].C.B[
].C.B[
].C.B[].C.B[
lecnaCtaeBehtelggototsserP
.FFOdnaNOnoitcnuf
].R.N[].R.N[
].R.N[
].R.N[].R.N[
,1noitcudeResioNtcelesotsserP
.FFOro,2noitcudeResioN
]CNUF[]CNUF[
]CNUF[
]CNUF[]CNUF[ , ]TA[]TA[
]TA[
]TA[]TA[
dna1TNAneewtebelggototsserP
.dnabzHM05/FHrof2TNA
]CNUF[]CNUF[
]CNUF[
]CNUF[]CNUF[ ,
]LEVEL/BN/7[]LEVEL/BN/7[
]LEVEL/BN/7[
]LEVEL/BN/7[]LEVEL/BN/7[
reknalBesioNehtelggototsserP
.FFOroNOnoitcnuf
]CNUF[]CNUF[
]CNUF[
]CNUF[]CNUF[ , [[[[[]]]]] .FFOrewopretropsnarTehthctiwS
USING ANOTHER TS-2000 AS A COMMANDER
To use another TS-2000(X) transceiver as a “Commander” (an external remote control unit), follow the steps below. Basically, it is the same as using a TM-D700A as a “Commander” (described on pages 83 and 84).
TS-2000(X) (Transporter) Setup:
1 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62A.
2 Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a
“Commander” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the
MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press [MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62A.
3 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 62B.
4 Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a
“Transporter” callsign, using [+]/[–] or the
MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press [MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the
callsign to Menu No. 62B.
Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and “-”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long including “-”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be entered:
WD6DJYZ If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the
maximum length is 6 characters.
WD6-DJY-1 You cannot use more than 1 “-” within a callsign.
-WD6DJY You cannot use a “-” as the first callsign character .
WD6DJY-19 An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.
5 Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH
control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky Commander II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).
6 Access Menu No. 62D and select the
communication speed for Sky Command II+.
Select 1200 bps or 9600 bps.
7 Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB. 8 Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on
the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command operation.
TS-2000 (Commander) Setup:
1 Access Menu No. 62A and 62B to enter the same
callsign that you entered for the TS-2000 (Transporter).
2 Access Menu No. 62C to select the same CTCSS
tone frequency that you selected for the TS-2000 (Transporter).
3 Access Menu No. 62D and select the same
communication speed that you selected for the TS-2000 (Transporter).
4 Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.
5 Set the same frequencies that you selected for the
“Transporter” for the main transceiver and sub­receiver.
Starting Sky Command ll+ operation:
1 On the Transporter, access Menu No. 62E. 2 Select T-PORTER (Transporter). 3 On the Commander, access Menu No. 62E. 4 Select COMMANDER (Commander). 5 Press [MAIN] on the Commander to start the
operation.
87
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
These keys and controls are available on the Commander to control the Transporter.
Note:
When the synconize operation is incomplete, the main display of the Commander may disappear. In this case, press [SUB] to re-syncronze.
You cannot recall memory channels 100 to 299 using [ENT] and the numeric keys. To recall memory channels 100 ~ 299, use [+] or [–].
You can recall only the memory channels that have HF/ 50 MHz frequencies.
Do not use VHF/ UHF frequencies that are suffering from the harmonics of HF/ 50 MHz transmissions.
The frequency control operations, such as the MAIN control and RIT/ XIT control, are much slower than using direct controls,
because each control command (in steps of 10 Hz) is sent as packet data.
When you change the frequency continuously, using the MAIN control or the MULTI/ CH control, the last entry of the Commander frequency is reflected on the HF/ 50 MHz transceiver.
Since Sky Command II+ requires 2 VHF/ UHF frequencies, check the operating frequencies carefully to avoid interference with other parties.
When the transceiver exits the Sky Command II+ operation, the internal TNC retains the data transfer speed in Menu No. 47. If a different data transfer speed is required for packet operation, reconfigure it to the desired value.
USING A SEPARATE TRANSPORTER
If you have more than 2 TH-D7A and/or TM-D700A transceivers, you can use one of the transceivers as a “Transporter”. This transceiver is connected to the TS-2000(X) via the RS-232C port, EXT SP jack, and Mic connector of the base station and the other TH-D7A or TM-D700A transceiver works as a “Commander”. With this configuration, you can turn the TS-2000(X) ON and OFF using the “Commander”. Refer to the instruction manual of the TH-D7A or TM-D700A for interfacing the transceiver to the TS-2000(X) transceiver.
TS-2000 + TH-D7A/ TM-D700A (Transporter) Setup:
1 Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a
“Transporter” and connect all the necessary cables to the TS-2000.
2 Select a frequency (HF/ 50 MHz band) on the
main transceiver of the TS-2000.
3 On the TS-2000 Press [MENU], then turn the
MULTI/ CH control to access Menu No. 62E. 4 Select a “CLIENT”. 5 Press [MENU] to complete. 6 Start the Transporter mode on the TH-D7A or
TM-D700A.
TH-D7A/ TM-D700A (Commander) Setup:
Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a “Commander”. Refer to the SKY COMMAND II chapter in the instruction manual to set up the transceiver as a “Commander”.
You can use a “Commander” as described on pages 84 and 86.
REPEATER FUNCTION (K-type ONLY)
This transceiver is capable of receiving signals on one band and retransmitting them on another band. For example, a signal received on the sub-receiver is retransmitted on the main transceiver. Similarly, a signal received on the main transceiver can be retransmitted on the sub-receiver’s frequency.
You can use any available frequency on the main transceiver or sub-receiver to receive and transmit. However, you cannot retransmit the received signals that are outside the available transmission frequencies. Additionally, you must use a different antenna for transmitting and receiving. For example, if you receive a VHF signal on the sub-receiver, you can retransmit it using UHF on the main transceiver. You cannot retransmit the signal using VHF of the main transceiver.
Note: For the repeater function to operate, the squelch levels of the main transceiver and sub-receiver must be adjusted so that no background noise can be heard.
LOCKED-BAND REPEATER
The transceiver always uses the same band to receive, and retransmits the received signals on the other band.
1 Select a desired receive frequency on the sub-
receiver.
2 Press [MAIN] and select a desired transmit
frequency on the main transceiver.
3 Adjust the squelch threshold level so that both
receivers mute.
4 Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to
access Menu No. 61A.
5 Select LOCKED, using [+].
•“LOCK A” appears.
Note: You can also reverse the receive and transmit bands, so that you receive on the main transceiver and transmit on the sub­receiver’s frequency.
CROSS-BAND REPEATER
The cross-band repeater is unlike the lock-band repeater in that both bands can be used to receive signals. When a signal is received on one band, it is retransmitted on the other band. To activate the cross-band repeater, select CROSS in Menu No. 61A in step 5.
Note:
The Repeater function has its own Time-out Timer which is set at 3 minutes. This value cannot be changed.
After activating the Repeater function, you cannot access Menu Nos. other than 61A and 61B.
HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION
If necessary, you can cause this transceiver to remain in the transmit mode for 500 ms after signals drop. Access Menu No. 61B (Repeater TX Hold) and select “ON”.
88
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT (OPTIONAL)
The optional DRU-3A unit allows you to record a voice message on up to 3 channels. After recording a message via your transceiver microphone, you can then send that message.
The maximum recording time for each channel is as follows:
Channel 1: Approx. 30 seconds Channel 2: Approx. 15 seconds Channel 3: Approx. 15 seconds
The DRU-3A is useful in many situations:
DX chasing or contest operation where repeated
calls are necessary for extended periods of time.
Checking interference complaints with other
equipment (lets you be in two places at one time).
Checking or adjusting your transmit signal or your
antenna(s) if it’s not convenient to be sitting in
front of your microphone.
Helping a friend adjust his/her antenna or receive
when he/she needs repeated test transmissions. For information on how to install the DRU-3A unit,
refer to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 97}.
6 Repeat steps 3 to 5 to record a message on
another channel.
Note: Pressing [ ] (POWER) cancels recording in progress and clears the memory channel.
MESSAGE PLAYBACK
You can play back the message in channel 1, 2, or 3 to check or to send. It is also possible to make a longer message, by consecutively playing back the messages of more than one channel, linking them together.
You can even repeatedly send a longer, linked message by using the Repeat function. To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 29A and select ON (Default is OFF). Then, select the repeat interval time in Menu No. 29B (Default is 10 seconds).
Note:
Pressing [ ] (POWER) cancels playback in progress.
The settings in Menu No. 29A and No. 29B are shared with CW Message Playback described in “CW MESSAGE MEMORY” {page 43}.
Checking Messages
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM.
Use the same mode for transmitting and receiving.
RECORDING MESSAGES
This section explains how to record a single message.
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM.
Use the same mode for transmitting and receiving.
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the
function OFF.
3 Press [FUNC], [1/ CH1/REC] to record the
message for channel 1.
•“¡|| REC WAIT” and “AP1 –” appear.
To exit the Record Standby mode and quit recording your message, press [CLR].
4 Press and hold [1/ CH1/REC], then begin
speaking into your microphone.
Three channels are available for recording messages. Press channel key [2/ CH2/REC] or [3/ CH3/REC] in place of [1/ CH1/REC], in step 3, to record the message on a different channel.
5 Release the key pressed in step 4 when you have
finished recording your message.
Also when the maximum recording time passes, recording stops.
The content of the channel is overwritten with the new message.
2 If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch
the function OFF.
3 Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or
[3/ CH3/REC], depending on which channel
you want to check.
For example, “s PLA Y BACK” and “AP 1– –” appear while playing back the message in channel 1.
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
4 To play back another message in sequence,
press the corresponding key ([1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]) while the first message is being played.
Up to three channels can be queued.
89
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
Sending Messages
1 Select SSB, FM, or AM.
Use the same mode for transmitting and receiving.
2 Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch VOX ON or
OFF.
If you switched VOX ON, skip step 3.
3 Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT]. 4 Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or
[3/ CH3/REC], depending on which channel
you want to use.
For example, “s PLA Y BACK” and “AP 1– –” appear while playing back the message in channel 1.
To interrupt playback, press [CLR].
5 To play back another message in sequence,
press the corresponding key ([1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]) while the first message is being played.
Up to 3 channels can be queued.
6 If you pressed [SEND] or Mic [PTT] in step 3,
press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].
Erasing a Recorded Message
1 Press [FUNC] then [1/ CH1/REC] or
[2/ CH2/REC] or [3/ CH3/REC] to select the
message which you want to erase.
•“¡|| REC WAIT” and “APn –” appear, where “n” represents the channel number.
2 To erase the recorded message, press and
hold the same key as in step 1 ([1/ CH1/REC],
[2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]), and press [CLR] at the same time.
A beep sounds and the message is erased.
Changing Inter-message Interval Time
For repetitive message playback, you can change the interval between each series of messages. Use Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the range of 0 to 60 seconds.
Changing Playback Volume
Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not change the volume for playback. To change the volume, access Menu No. 14 to select the playback volume level from OFF and 1 to 9.
90
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
NIAM BUS
reteM-S
leveL
-ecnuonnA
tnem
reteM-S
leveL
-ecnuonnA
tnem
3-11S11S
42S22S
6-53S33S
74S44S
9-85S55S
016S66S
21-117S77S
318S88S
51-419S99S 81-61Bd0101Bd01 02-91Bd0211Bd02 22-12Bd0321Bd03 52-32Bd0431Bd04 82-62Bd0541Bd05 03-92Bd0651Bd06
VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL)
Install the optional VS-3 unit to use this function. Each time you change the transceiver mode such as VFO A/B or Memory Recall, the transceiver automatically announces the new mode. In addition, you can program the front panel [PF] key so that pressing it makes the transceiver announce the displayed information. If you have the optional MC-47 microphone, you can program one of the Mic [PF] keys for this function as well.
For an explanation on how to install the VS-3 unit, refer to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 97}.
The table below indicates what the transceiver automatically announces when it changes the settings.
desserPyeK noitarepO tnemecnuonnA
]B/A[
]–[,]+[ egnahcdnaB
]LLAC[ lennahcllaCycneuqerf+llaC
]M/OFV[
]UNEM[ /
]–[,]+[
]NI.M[
]TNE[
HC/ITLUM
lortnoc
yekciremuN
yrtne
]•[
Note: The PF key assignment parameter is announced as the number shown below.
66INOMPSD76RMKCIUQ86NI.MKCIUQ96TILPS 07TES-FT17B/A27M/OFV37B=A 47NACS57OFV>M67NI.M77ENUTWC 871HC972HC083HC18ENIF 28RLC38LLAC48LRTC58zHM1 682/1TNA78BN88.R.N98.C.B
09.N.A99FFO
rebmununeM361ECIOV462ECIOV56INOMXR
AOFV BOFV
roOFV yromeM
ro
llaceR
.oNuneM
noitceles
yromeM
edomllorcS
ycneuqerF
yrtne
retnE
.oNuneM
segnahc yromeM
.oNlennahc
segnahc gniretnE
srebmun
ehtgniruD ycneuqerf
yrtne
For the [PF] key, the transceiver will announce different information, depending on whether VOICE1 or VOICE2 is selected.
VOICE1:
VFO or memory channel frequencies are announced beginning with the 10 MHz digit and continuing through to the 10 Hz digit. If the memory channel has no data stored, “open” is announced. For the MHz decimal point, “point” is announced. For the kHz decimal point, a short pause (200 ms) is made. A 200 ms pause is also made between the channel number and the frequency.
Menu numbers and their settings are announced with a short pause (200 ms) between the menu number and the setting.
Note: If operating a key or a control changes the contents of the display while an announcement is in progress, the announcement is interrupted.
ycneuqerf+OFV
VOICE2:
The S-meter readings at the time you pressed the key, are announced, for example, “S5” or “20 dB”.
ycneuqerf+OFV
The table below shows the available announcements when the [PF] (VOICE2) is pressed.
.oNyromeM+RM
ycneuqerf+
+.oN+uneM
/rebmundetceleS
retemarap
+lennahC+RM
)tigid-3(.oNyromeM
ycneuqerF+
+.oN+uneM
/rebmundetceleS
retemarap
yromeM+RM
+.oNlennahc
ycneuqerf
rebmunyrevE
deretne
ztrehageM
1 Assign VOICE1 or VOICE2 to the front panel [PF]
key by accessing Menu No. 51A. Or, if you are using the optional MC-47 microphone, assign one of the Mic [PF] keys to either VOICE1 or VOICE2. For programming Mic [PF] keys, refer to “PROGRAM FUNCTION KEYS” {page 77}.
2 Press the [PF] key that you programmed.
An announcement is made based on the
VOICE1 or VOICE2 selection.
To interrupt the announcement, press the [PF]
key again.
91
15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES
MICROPROCESSOR RESET
If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning, resetting the microprocessor default settings may resolve the problem. There are 2 levels of resetting the microprocessor of the TS-2000(X): partial reset and full reset.
INITIAL SETTINGS
For each VFO, the factory defaults for the operating frequency and mode are as follows:
MAIN VFO A: 14.000.000 MHz/ USB
MAIN VFO B: 14.000.000 MHz/ USB
SUB VFO: 144.000.00 MHz/ FM The Memory channels and Quick Memory channels
have no data stored.
PARTIAL RESET
Perform a Partial Reset if a key or control does not function according to the instructions in this manual. The following data is NOT erased by performing a Partial Reset.
Memory channel data
Menu settings
Antenna tuner preset data
ANT 1/ANT 2 data Reset the transceiver by pressing [A/B]+[ ].
A confirmatin message appears. Press [A/B] to proceed. Otherwise, press any other key to cancel the Partial Reset and return to normal operation.
“HELLO” appears on the display and the VFOs resets to the factory default values.
FULL RESET
Perform a Full Reset if you want to erase all the data in all the memory channels. In addition, this function resets all the settings that you customized, to the factory defaults (i.e.- menu settings, antenna tuner preset data, etc.).
Reset the transceiver by pressing [A=B]+[ ]. A confirmation message appears when performing
the Full Reset. Press [A=B] to proceed. Otherwise, press any other key to cancel the Full Reset and return to normal operation.
When you perform the full reset:
“HELLO” appears on the display.
All frequencies, modes, memory data and AT preset data are set to the factory default values (refer to “INITIAL SETTINGS”, above).
92
Loading...